OS/2 Shareware BBS: 10 Tools/10-Tools.zip/odtlktv6.zip/ODTLKT/TOOLKIT/BOOK/ODUI.INF

OS/2 Help File | 1995-11-21 | 235KB | 8,237 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. About This Book ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OpenDoc** for OS/2* Human Interface Guidelines describe the human interface
mechanisms and interactions essential to the OpenDoc software architecture. It
combines a discussion of the philosophy of the OpenDoc Human Interface with the
actual implementation of interface elements. In addition to text-based
discussions, this document makes use of screen captures and user scenarios to
further facilitate the developer's understanding of OpenDoc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.1. Who Should Read This Book ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This book is intended for people who design and develop products for use on
computers running the OS/2 OpenDoc architecture.

It provides developers with background information that can help them plan and
make decisions about their product design.

This document is written with the assumption that the developer is familiar
with the concepts and terminology commonly used with today's graphical user
interfaces and CUA* architecture. Refer to the Object-Oriented Interface
Design-IBM* Common User Access Guidelines for information about the CUA
architecture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2. How This Book is Organized ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This book contains seven chapters and four appendices. Developers can read
these guidelines from start to finish, or use them as a reference in which to
look up specific pieces of information. The following information describes the
type of information that can be found in each section of the document.

     Overview of OpenDoc

      The chapter describes the basic philosophy of the OS/2 OpenDoc interface
      and how users and developers can benefit from this new approach.

     Part Basics

      Parts are the fundamental elements in OpenDoc that allow users to
      complete their tasks. This chapter describes the various ways users can
      represent parts. Developers should especially be aware of the discussion
      of the components needed for end users to be able to both edit and view
      these parts.

     Part Structure

      This chapter describes the basic set of menu choices available in any
      OpenDoc window, the new specification for OS/2 window appearance,
      interaction, and pop-up menus.

     Properties

      Each part has a set of properties. This chapter contains a description of
      part properties, both those that may be modified by the user and those
      that may not. Properties for a particular part include kind specific
      preferences such as default font, and general part preferences such as
      the ability for a particular part to restrict the types of parts that may
      be embedded within it.

     Interactions

      Parts can be manipulated in several different ways. This chapter first
      describes how users can view parts and how they can change a part
      representation to an icon or a frame or to open a part into its own
      window. This section then describes selection and activation of parts-the
      essential interactions for editing both the part and its content. Next,
      the section describes how users can - through either menu commands or
      their drag-and-drop equivalents - edit parts. Finally, the section
      discusses how users may create and delete parts.

     Sources for Parts

      This chapter describes how users can create and access new parts through
      the use of templates and parts.

     Drafts, Linking, and Scripting

      OpenDoc supports several features that could greatly enhance users
      productivity. This chapter describes Drafts, Linking, and Scripting.
      Drafts allow users to record the history of changes of a document.
      Linking allows users to automatically update the same information found
      on different pages or documents. Scripting supports the automation of
      tasks through easy to create scripts. Developers should read this section
      to determine how their products might take advantage of these features.

     Link Graphic Details

      Appendix A shows the pixel-by-pixel illustrations of the various frame
      states used in OpenDoc.

     Active and Selected Frame Emphasis States

      Appendix B shows the frame emphasis states.

     Crop Indicators

      Appendix C shows crop indicators.

     Pointer Graphics

      Appendix D shows the various pointers used in OpenDoc.

     Notices

      This section provides a listing of the special notices and trademarks
      that apply to this manual.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.3. About Component Integration Laboratories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OpenDoc is presented and maintained through an organization devoted to
promoting cross-platform standards, architectures, and protocols in a
vendor-independent fashion. This organization, Component Integration
Laboratories (CI Labs), is composed of a number of platform and application
vendors with a common interest in solving OpenDoc issues and promoting
interoperability.

CI Labs supports several levels of participation through different membership
categories. If you are interested in shaping the future direction of component
software, or if you simply need to be kept abreast of the latest developments,
you can become a member. For an information packet, send your mailing address
to:

Component Integration Laboratories
PO Box 61747
Synnyvale, CA  94088-1747

 Telephone:     [phone]
 FAX:           [phone]
 Internet:      [e-mail]


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.4. Prerequisite Knowledge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This document is written with the assumption that the developer is familiar
with the concepts and terminology commonly used with today's today's graphical
user interfaces, particularly the Object-Oriented Interface Design-IBM Common
User Access Guidelines (CUA '91).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.5. Related Publications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following related publications might be useful when creating a
user-interface using OpenDoc for OS/2:

     Object-Oriented Interface Design IBM Common User Access Guidelines
     OpenDoc for OS/2 Programming Guide
     OpenDoc for OS/2 Programming Reference
     Open Scripting Architecture for OS/2 Programming Guide and Reference
     Open Scripting Architecture for OS/2 Quick Reference


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.6. Conventions Used in This Book ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following document conventions are used in this book.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.6.1. Documentation Conventions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Throughout this library of documents, the following conventions distinguish the
different elements of text:

 bold              Menu choices, names of keys, push buttons, check boxes,
                   radio buttons, and field names.

 italics           Titles of documents, and first occurrences of words
                   appearing in the Glossary.

 CAPITALS          File names and error message text.

 Abbreviations     Mouse button 1 and mouse button 2 are designated by MB1 and
                   MB2 after the first occurrence of each.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Overview of OpenDoc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OpenDoc is designed to facilitate the construction of compound, customizable,
collaborative, and cross-platform documents. To do this, OpenDoc provides an
object-oriented user model rather than an application-centric model. That is,
the user focuses on a document rather than the application that manipulates
that document. An OpenDoc document can contain data as diverse as navigable
movies, sounds, and animation, as well as database access such as networked
calendars, traditional spreadsheets, graphics, and text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. Comparison to Today's Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

At first glance, most users will not notice the difference between an OpenDoc
document and one of today's documents. Interaction techniques learned in the
application-oriented world allows users to use the basic functions of OpenDoc.
However, on closer inspection, the user will realize that OpenDoc documents
allow much more flexibility than is available today. For example, when users
paste something into a document today, they often cannot easily modify the
content. Often the user must go back and modify the original document and then
repaste the changes back into the target document. OpenDoc documents are much
more flexible because the user can edit the content in place. Thus, there is
less intrusive context-switching and all parts of the document are consolidated
into a single file.

A few of today's applications have built-in editors for multiple kinds of
content. However, only a few kinds of content are supported and these editors
often are different from the ones used when creating the original content.
However, OpenDoc uses the same editor that originally created the content
unless the user asks for a different one.

Users will discover new features that make OpenDoc documents easier to create
and edit than today's documents. For example, with more pervasive drag and
drop, more editing can be done using direct manipulation.

Developers can and will bundle together parts into units that are designed to
support sets of user tasks. Over time users will learn that they will now be
able to add more functionality to their applications and that they no longer
have to switch applications to create multimedia documents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. User Benefits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OpenDoc is designed to provide users with benefits that are not available in
today's applications interface. The benefits OpenDoc provides are:

     Multimedia documents

      Any type of media that is implemented as a part can be placed into an
      OpenDoc document. OpenDoc can handle all current and future types of
      media.

     Simplicity

      Users can put any kind of media into a document with nothing more complex
      than cut-and-paste or drag-and-drop.

     Edit in place

      Users can edit parts right where they appear in a document, without
      having to cut and paste between different application windows. This lets
      users focus on document content, not applications. And it lets them take
      advantage of the context provided by the surrounding document.

     Consolidation

      Rather than manually managing the various files that make up a document,
      users can let an OpenDoc document hold the pieces. As the various pieces
      of content are stored in a single document, exchanging documents with
      other people becomes easier.

     Consistency

      Users can apply a common set of tools in different OpenDoc documents.
      They can substitute (compatible) part editors for ones that came with an
      application. Thus, they only need to learn one way to edit each type of
      data, such as text, because they can use the same text editor everywhere.

     Tailorability

      Users can combine generic parts from various sources to address specific
      tasks. They can define customized parts containing predefined content and
      other parts and use these parts as sources for new parts. They can
      replace part editors with their preferred ones, as mentioned above. They
      can use and create scripts to customize parts.

     Uniformity

      OpenDoc defines a uniform human interface for embedding and manipulating
      all kinds of media in documents. Part developers can write parts that fit
      together in a consistent interface by following these guidelines and
      employing the modular nature of the OpenDoc code.

     Scalability

      The OpenDoc Human Interface addresses a wide range of users, from novice
      to advanced. Novices can get started immediately; for example, first-time
      users can create compound documents easily, without having to understand
      advanced operations like linking and scripting. Experts will find no
      ceiling to their abilities; the open-ended OpenDoc architecture ensures a
      growth path.

     History

      OpenDoc documents have a history that can be inspected. The user decides
      when to create a new draft, or revision, of the document, which is stored
      within the same file. The user can easily look at the state of a document
      as it was yesterday, or two months ago as need be.

     Forgiveness

      OpenDoc provides better support for Undo than most platforms today. In
      addition, OpenDoc allows the user to Undo multiple times, rather than
      only once.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. New Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are many new features of the OpenDoc Human Interface that enhance the
user experience. These include:

     Transparent Applications

      Users don't deal with editors, except in rare situations.

     Editor Substitution

      Easy to replace compatible editors as user preference.

     Edit in Place

      Allows the user to consolidate all pieces into one document and still
      make necessary changes without returning to each source document.

     Drag-and-Drop

      Available everywhere.

     Drafts

      Documents have a draft history.

     Superior Linking Interface

      Allows users to automatically update the same information found on
      different pages or documents

     Intelligent Paste

      Anticipates user expectation about the result of a paste operation when
      the target is a different kind than the source.

     Templates

      While not new, we expand the use to areas other than the WorkPlace Shell.

     Missing Editor Problem

      When the user doesn't have a specific editor there are fallbacks to
      handle the problem more gracefully than today.

     Better Undo

      System-wide and multiple levels of Undo allow better error recovery.

     Concurrency

      Multiple parts within a document may be performing different tasks at
      once.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Part Basics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The fundamental building blocks in OpenDoc with which users accomplish tasks
are known as parts. This chapter describes the basics of these parts:

     How parts are represented
     How components of parts provide editing and viewing capabilities


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. User Model of Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OpenDoc provides an object-oriented user model, where documents are objects
that contain other objects, and where each object may have a distinct behavior.
However, OpenDoc uses the term parts rather than objects because parts implies
that each item can be a subset or superset of another item or stand alone on
its own. To users, parts appear and behave consistently because OpenDoc
implements the basic part behavior and provides guidelines to help developers
design individual part behaviors. This supports the goal of making users feel
that parts fit together naturally within a document.

OpenDoc is an ideal architecture for multimedia documents. In OpenDoc, each new
kind of medium that comes along - video, sound, animation, simulation - can be
presented in parts and part templates. Thus, an OpenDoc document will
automatically be able to contain all kinds of media as they appear without any
modification to the existing parts.

Parts are the primitives with which users accomplish tasks. They allow all
kinds of content to be edited in a single document using the user's preferred
editors. Parts allow functions to be combined in flexible ways enabling them to
address tasks more effectively.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. Part Representations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The user sees each part as a self-contained entity. It has contents, behavior,
and a set of properties. Parts can contain data and other parts as well.

Parts can be represented in the following ways:

     Icons

      An icon (large, small, or thumbnail) is a small picture that stands for a
      part. Icons serve the same role in OpenDoc as they do in todays standard
      graphical user interfaces (GUIs). Icons provide handles to parts,
      allowing them to be manipulated as a whole. Since icons are visual
      representations of the part, and do not display the part's contents, a
      user cannot edit the contents of a part from the icon.

     Frames

      A frame not only represents a part, but also contains a view of the
      part's contents. Since a frame displays the part's contents, a user can
      usually edit the contents of a part from within a frame.

 Icons and frames are alternate representations-a single instance of a part may
 appear as an icon or as a frame, but not both.

 A part inside an OpenDoc document is often represented as a frame; in a folder
 window, parts are often represented as icons. When represented as a frame, a
 part's content is usually visible and editable. However there are exceptions.
 For example, a sound part may display a button or icon instead of a visible
 representation of the sound itself. Clicking on the button might play its
 sound, not edit it. A database-query part may display the values being
 returned, perhaps as a graph, instead of the query definition, which might be
 a property of the part.

 It is important to understand that users do not manipulate parts directly;
 they manipulate frames and icons. Frames represent the part and the part's
 content, and icons represent the part to the user. A part's content may be
 seen in several different frames at once. For example, a table part may be
 seen as a chart in one frame and as a table in a different frame. A container
 part may have a mixture of frames and icons at once. Any frame may be viewed
 as an icon at any time, without affecting any other frame of the same part.

 In addition, a part be represented in multiple frames. When the user deletes a
 frame or icon, the corresponding part is not necessarily deleted. For example,
 if a part is represented in both a chart frame and a table frame and the user
 deletes the chart frame, the table frame is not deleted. Therefore, the user's
 data is not deleted.(**)

 Properties are characteristics about a part. Each part has several properties;
 for example, whether it should be displayed as an icon or a frame, which
 editor to use, who last modified the contents of the part and when.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.1. Part Icons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An icon is a small picture that represents a part. Icons serve the same role in
OpenDoc as they do in today's standard graphical user interfaces (GUIs). They
provide handles to parts, allowing them to be manipulated as a whole. Icons may
be dragged on the Desktop and between windows. They may be the target for drops
during drag operations. They may be opened into windows and closed back into
icons. They may also be changed into frames and changed back into icons.

An icon will have a different appearance when a window is open on the part it
represents; for example, OS/2 adds cross-hatching to the background of an
in-use icon.

The standard OpenDoc representations are:  large icon, small icon, thumbnail,
and frame.  Part developers are encouraged to support and implement these
representations for their parts. Standard views in OpenDoc for OS/2 are: Icons,
Details, Tree, and document.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.2. Icon Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part icons in OS/2 have three possible sizes (in VGA mode):

     Large icon (32 x 32 pixels)

      It has the same size and general appearance as other OS/2 icons. When
      OpenDoc parts are represented as icons, there is nothing unique about
      their appearance that would distinguish them from WorkPlace Shell
      objects.

     Small icon (16 x 16 pixels)

      This is the size used when icons are viewed as small icons in folders, or
      in Details views.

     Thumbnail (64 x 64 pixels)

      This is a new size introduced by OpenDoc. It differs from the other sizes
      in two respects:

        -  It is larger than the other sizes
        -  Instead of showing a generic shape for all instances of a type of
           part, it shows a miniature representation (thumbnail) of a page of
           the part's contents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.3. Part Frames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A frame is an area of the display screen that represents a part. Frames are
normally rectangular, but they need not be. Like icons, frames:

     Provide a handle onto parts, allowing parts to be manipulated as a whole
     Can be dragged on the desktop and between windows
     Can be the target for drops during drag operations
     Can be opened into windows and closed back into frames
     Can be closed into icons and reopened back into frames

 Unlike an icon, however, a frame allows a part's contents to be seen and
 edited.

  Frames showing how a document is composed of embedded parts

 Frames allow a part's content to be edited in place, without requiring the
 user to open separate windows. In addition, there may be many frames showing
 the content of a single part. For example, when editing a 3D drawing the user
 may wish to see a top view, side view, face-on view, and wire-frame view. Or,
 a part might provide a graphical and tabular view of its contents. Or, the
 header on a page layout part might be showing the same part on each page. Any
 change the user makes in one frame is immediately reflected in all other
 visible frames on the same part. Because different kinds of parts have
 different requirements for passing changes to all frames, OpenDoc provides the
 capability but does not specify the interface.

 Frames (like icons) can be opened into windows. Such windows are transitory
 views, not permanent representations of parts, while frames are persistent.
 When a frame is opened into a window, the frame remains visible in its place.
 Because frames already show the contents of parts, one might ask why one would
 open a frame into a window. The answer is that some parts contain more content
 than can be displayed in their frames. For example, a spreadsheet part may be
 quite large, with only a portion of it appearing in a particular frame.
 Opening it into a window allows the entire spreadsheet to be seen and edited
 and allows the user to adjust which which portion will appear in the frame.
 See Displaying Parts for more information.

 The preferred representation of contained parts is a property of the
 container. Some parts, such as folders, prefer to show embedded parts as
 icons. Others, such as text documents, prefer to show them as frames. When a
 part is copied from a Desktop folder to an OpenDoc document, the copied part
 changes its representation from an icon to a frame (see An icon for a part is
 dragged from a folder to a document window.). Conversely, when a part is
 copied from an OpenDoc document to a Desktop folder, the copied part changes
 its representation from a frame to an icon. In neither case do the contents or
 properties of the copied part change. But once inside a container, part's
 representations may be specified on a part by part basis.

  An icon for a part is dragged from a folder to a document
  window

  The icon becomes a frame in the document window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.4. Frame States and Borders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section refers only to parts in a frame representation. A frame may be in
one of three states: active, inactive, or selected. A frame is active when it
contains the selection (which may be null); this state is indicated by the
active frame border, as shown in Two different frame states.. Normally, the
active part receives commands and keyboard events, and its menu, palettes, and
other user-interface elements are displayed. The user-interface elements of the
previously active frame are hidden. Only one frame at a time may be active.

In general, whenever the user clicks mouse button 1 (MB1) in a part frame, the
frame becomes active (if not already active). Large icon, small icon, and
thumbnail representations do not become active. They become selected and their
container becomes active. If the part does not support activation, then the
part becomes selected and its container is activated. Parts that do not support
activation are those that have been bundled or those that are provided as
simple parts.(**)

Being inactive does not mean that a part isn't running. Parts may execute
asynchronously whether they are active or inactive, even if they are displayed
as icons.

In addition to activating frames, the user may select them. Selecting frames is
described in Selecting Parts. Selected frames appear differently from active
frames. The active frame has a standard appearance but the selected frame
appearance is determined by the container as shown in the following figure.

Two different frame states
Note that when a frame is selected as a whole, it is not active. Its container
is active. Every part in OpenDoc, except root parts are contained in another
part.

An active graphics frame containing a selected text frame


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.5. Frame Shape ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A frame's shape is the area available for displaying the frame's contents. A
frame's shape is often rectangular, although it need not be. For example, a
button might have rounded corners. Some applications may enable direct
manipulation of the shape; others may provide indirect manipulation by a menu
or Properties notebook; still others may provide no control over the shape. It
is not required that the user be given control over the shape.

A rectangular frame

A frame's shape determines how closely other data may wrap to its visible
contents.

An irregularly shaped frame


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.6. Bundled Frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To treat all embedded parts inside a frame as a single atomic object, a frame
can be bundled. Bundled frame contents cannot be selected. Any mouse click
inside the frame's contents selects the entire frame. This allows the frame to
be easily manipulated as a whole. This behavior of a bundled frame is not
exactly the same as the effects of the Group command often found in graphics
programs; Group simply ties a set of selected objects together, while bundling
a frame treats all embedded parts as a single object, including the frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. Part Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Parts can contain both intrinsic data and other parts. A part's intrinsic data
is the contents directly in the part (not data contained within the part's
embedded parts). This data is called the part's intrinsic content. For example,
the intrinsic content of a text part would be zero or more characters. The
intrinsic content of a graphics part might be lines, circles, rectangles, and
other shapes, while the intrinsic content of a video part is digitized video.
Likewise, sound parts contain digitized sound, and simulation parts contain
executable code.

In addition to its intrinsic contents, a part may contain other parts as shown
in the following figure.

A text part with an embedded simple part

Part developers are encouraged to allow their parts to contain other parts.
However, part developers may or may not choose to allow other parts to be
placed inside their parts. A key characteristic of OpenDoc is that if a part
can contain one kind of part, it can contain all kinds of parts, since OpenDoc
supplies a uniform wrapper for parts. (Contrast this with the small number of
standard data types supported today, such as text, PICT and TIFF). To a part,
other parts are opaque black boxes. Parts know nothing about the internal
structure or semantics of other parts. A part allowing other parts to be
embedded in it just means that the part is capable of handling the basic part
wrapper.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1. Part Structure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A part that resides on the Desktop or in a folder is considered a root part
document. This document is accessible from the file system, for example, a
document that resides in an OS/2 folder.

A root part is not embedded within another part. In OpenDoc, parts can serve as
root parts or as embedded parts. The root part controls the basic layout
structure of the document (text and graphics). Because the document can now
contain embedded frames displaying any kind of content, the document is no
longer a block of data controlled by a single application. Rather it is
comprised of smaller blocks of data controlled by many software components.

The top-level part of a window is the part on which the window was opened. This
part may be a root part or an embedded part (that has been opened into its own
window). The top-level part establishes the basic behavior for that window,
including:

     Basic editing metaphors (text scroll, drawing, spreadsheet, etc.)
     Saving paradigm (whether saving is manual or automatic, currently
      available only for the root part)
     Valid printing options for that part.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. Editors and Viewers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The behavior of a particular kind of part is implemented by two pieces of
software: an editor and a viewer. Typically, the user modifies the content of a
part using its editor, and on occasion might be able to only view the part's
content. For an example of a viewer, consider that most users will need only a
video viewer, while a few users will have an editor that will produce or edit
video documents. This section describes editors and viewers in more detail.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.1. Editors as Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part editors and viewers replace the traditional concept of applications in
OpenDoc. Theoretically, anything a user can do in a current application a user
could do with an OpenDoc part. For example, a user could have a spreadsheet
that looked just like one of today's spreadsheet applications. However, there
would be big differences in the parts compared to today's spreadsheets:

     How the part was built

      With OpenDoc, applications will typically be built by combining
      off-the-shelf part editors with custom built ones. Part developers can
      provide all the functionality the user desires without having to write
      all the pieces.

     How the part is accessed

      OpenDoc for OS/2 has an object-oriented user interface. The user will
      rarely need to deal directly with editors. The user simply opens the part
      and the part opens using its preferred editor or viewer.

     Ability to add new parts

      The user can purchase additional parts and their editors, such as new
      charts, and immediately use them with existing parts on the system.

     Ability to replace parts

      The user can replace pieces of an application that are implemented as
      separate part editors. For example, if a spreadsheet application included
      a chart maker implemented as a separate part, the user could substitute a
      different chart maker. This gives users far more tailorability than is
      available today.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.2. Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An editor is a piece of software that displays a part's content and provides a
user interface for modifying that kind of content. The user interface may
include menus, controls, tool palettes, rulers, and other interaction
techniques.

For example, a text part editor interprets the intrinsic data stored in the
part, and draws the characters inside the part's frame, breaking lines of text
to fit the frame's width if necessary. This editor allows the user to select
ranges of text, using the mouse or other input devices, and apply menu choices
(such as Bold and Italic). More sophisticated versions of a Text part editor
might provide rulers with direct-manipulation tab settings and margins.

A part editor may support multiple kinds of data; for example Surf Writer 2.0
might support Styled Text and AcmeSoft Text in addition to its own data format.
Usually all the kinds supported by a common editor are in the same category.
See Properties for more information about kinds and categories.

If a part is capable of containing other parts, its editor takes these
contained parts into consideration when displaying its content. Imagine a text
part that contains a graphics part. The text parts editor might wrap the text
in such a way that the text does not run across the graphic part's boundaries.
In other situations, the text may actually be overlaid, as in a document with a
corporate logo in the background. Exactly how contained parts are handled with
respect to intrinsic content is up to the part developer. However, the part
editor is not responsible for drawing the contents of a contained part; that is
the responsibility of the contained part's editor (or viewer).

The editor code is a distinct object, separated from content, thus promoting
code sharing. However, the editor is not typically seen as a distinct object by
the user. Unlike applications today, the  part editor appears to be rolled into
the part itself. The user sees the part content and editor as one single
object. Whenever the user moves a part to another location, the part editor
appears to moves with it.

The editor itself becomes visible to the user as an object only when the editor
is being installed or replaced, or the preferred editor of a particular type of
part is being set. See Installing and Removing Editors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.3. Viewer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When the user wants to send a document to a colleague, the user may not want to
include the part's editor in the document for one of two reasons: the colleague
may not have licensed the kinds of parts contained in the document, or the user
might want the colleague only to read (and not modify) the document. The viewer
comes into play in these situations.

A viewer is a subset of its corresponding editor's code that displays and
prints a part's content.  For example, a text part viewer contains just enough
code that understand the intrinsic content and present it to the user on the
screen or paper. Still, it should render the content with the same fidelity as
the editor.

Because the viewer is not designed to support editing the part's content,
several of the basic choices found on the menus are disabled. For example, Save
and Revert to Saved, might be disabled as well as Undo, Redo, Cut, Paste, Paste
as, and Delete. The part developer may choose to enable any one of these menu
items, if appropriate, or include advanced features in the viewer, such as
cropping or resizing the intrinsic contents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.4. Similarities Between Editors and Viewers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Both editors and viewers are capable of interpreting the stored data contained
in the part and presenting that data to the user, perhaps dynamically (such as
sounds or movies).

Editors and viewers are both pieces of software that must be installed on the
user's system. Without either an editor or viewer for a particular part type,
the part's data cannot be viewed or manipulated by the user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.5. Differences Between Editors and Viewers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Once an editor is installed on a user's system, the user does not pass the
editor software to other people, unless permitted by a license agreement.

Viewers, on the other hand, may be freely distributed, to enable and encourage
document interchange. However, viewers provide only a limited menu subset.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Part Structure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This chapter describes the menu structure for parts and the window behaviors.
Drafts, a special feature of OpenDoc root part documents is described in
Drafts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The document shell provides the basic menu bar when a document is opened. These
menus are defined below. In addition to the menu bar, each part has a pop-up
menu just like other objects in the WorkPlace Shell. Pop-up menus contain only
choices that are currently available for a part, while menu-bar menus show all
possible choices, with those currently unavailable grayed out.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.1. Menu-Bar Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When an OpenDoc document is open, several standard menu choices are displayed
in the menu bar.

Note:  The {Active Part} menus are not part of the standard menu. Parts may add
       these menu choices.

  It is recommended that the parts add choices to the appropriate menus,
 according to the scope of the choice.

 The standard menus are and their contents are:

     {Top-level Part}(**)

      Choices that affect the top-level part shown in the window. In a document
      window, this choice is named Document. When an embedded part is opened
      into a window, this first menu choice will be renamed to the category
      name for that part.

     Edit

      Standard choices that affect selected parts or selected intrinsic data.

     View

      Choices that affect the view of the active part in a window or choices
      that display other parts associated with the active part (such as tool
      bars and palettes).

     Active (optional)

      Choices that affect the currently active part in a window.

     {Additional menus affecting the active part}

     Help

      Choices that provide Help on the active part.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. {Top-level Part} Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu always applies to the top-level part in the window. The mnemonic used
for this menu is D if Document is used as the name. If another category name is
used, some other letter that fits the category name should be used as a
mnemonic.

The base menu items: Edit, View, and Help are the same on the top-level and
embedded-level menu's. The Document menu pertains only to the top-level menu.
An embedded part's first menu will be specific to the part.

Document Menu


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.1. Document Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu appears in the window on a root part document. The menu choices apply
to the root part.

The following choices open another window on the document:

 Open as
           A cascaded menu that lists the different views available for the
           part. All container parts need to support the Icons, Tree, and
           Details(**) views in addition to their part-specific views. Choosing
           this choice opens another window on the document into the specified
           view.

 Properties
           Opens a Properties notebook on the root part.

 The following information describes data-transfer and convenience choices in
 the document:

 Drafts
           A cascading choice leading to Create draft and Draft history.

 Save
           Saves a copy of the current document (root part) and all its
           embedded parts. If Perfect Save is available as an option to the
           user, Save will be grayed whenever Perfect Save is set.

 Revert to Saved
           Reverts to the last saved version of a document and all its embedded
           parts. The user cannot Undo this action.

 Print...
           Prints the entire document.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. {Embedded Part} Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu appears in a window that has been opened on an embedded part. This
menu always applies to an embedded part that has been opened into its own
window. When an embedded part is opened into a window, the first menu choice in
the new window will be named to the category name for the part.

The following information describes choices that open another window on the
part.

 Open as
           A cascaded menu that lists the different views available for the
           part. All container parts need to support the Icons, Tree, and
           Details(**) view in addition to their part-specific views. This
           choice opens another window on the part.

 Properties
           Opens a Properties notebook on the top-level part in the window.

 The following information describes data-transfer and convenience actions in
 the embedded part menu:

 Print...
           Prints the embedded part. A part adds this menu choice only if it
           supports printing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1. Edit Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These choices vary in scope, as follows:

     Undo and Redo affect everything in the document.
     Create, Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste as, Break link, and Delete apply to the
      selected parts or data.
     Select all and Deselect all apply to all contents of the active part.

 The mnemonic for the Edit menu is E.

  Edit Menu
  The Edit menu shows the use of Ctrl+X, C, V, for Cut, Copy,
  and Paste. Parts should also support the OS/2 Presentation Manager
  standard of Shift+Insert for Paste; Ctrl+Insert for Copy, and
  Shift+Delete for Cut

 Undo {action}
           Reverses the effects of the most recent user action that has not
           been undone. Undo restores all parts to their states before that
           action. Not all user actions are reversible. OpenDoc supports
           multiple levels of Undo. For example, if the user selects Undo three
           times in succession, then the last three reversible actions are
           reversed.

 Redo {action}
           Reverses the effects of the last Undo action that hasn't been
           redone, restoring all parts to their states before the Undo. OpenDoc
           supports multiple levels of Redo. Each time the user selects Redo,
           the previous Undo action, if any, is redone. This choice is
           available for use only until all previous Undos have been reversed.

 The following are data-transfer actions:

 Create
           Creates a new part of the same type as the selected part. A new part
           will be created on the clipboard.

 Cut
           Removes the selection from its current position and places it on the
           clipboard. When followed by a Paste choice, this provides the Move
           operation. See Cut, Copy, Paste, and Create.

 Copy
           Leaves the selection undisturbed as it places a copy of the
           selection on the clipboard. When used with the Paste choice, this
           provides the Copy operation. See Cut, Copy, Paste, and Create.

 Paste
           Pastes the contents of the clipboard in the cursored position or in
           a default position in the target part. When used with the Cut and
           Copy choices, this provides the Move and Copy operations. See Cut,
           Copy, Paste, and Create.

 Paste as...
           Provides the same function as the Paste choice, but also displays a
           dialog box that allows the user to specify the data format for
           pasting the clipboard into the destination. Converts the clipboard
           contents to the user-specified format. Paste as also allows user to
           create links. See Linking Documents.

 Break link
           (For target links only) This choice will break the link with the
           source. The action cannot be undone. A confirmation dialog box will
           be given before the link is broken. See Linking Documents.

 Delete selection
           Removes the selection from the active part. This action is not
           undoable.

 The following information describes convenience actions on the Edit menu:

 Select all
           Selects all the contents of the active part.

 Deselect all
           Deselects all the contents of the active part.

 The following information describes actions that apply only to selected parts.

 Open selection
           Opens the selected part into a window of its own. The part will
           appear in the new window in its default view. If more than one part
           is selected, this choice will open each selected part into a
           separate window.

 Selection properties
           Opens a properties notebook on the selected part. If more than one
           part is selected, this choice will open a separate properties
           notebook for each selected part.

 Show selection as
           Changes the representation(s) of the selected embedded part(s) in
           the current window. A cascaded menu contains representations
           available for the selected part.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2. View Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Controls the views of the active part and the display of related items like
tool bars or palettes. Any views the user can change should be put as the first
items in the View menu. All container parts should support Icons, Tree, and
Details views. The mnemonic for the View menu is V.

View Menu
Note the status area at the bottom of the window. This
area provides information about the interface element under the cursor
or pointer.

 {View x}
           The various views available for the active part (Table and Chart for
           example). If several views exist the developer can place them in a
           cascaded menu called View part as.

 Open As
           Opens the active part into a new window of its own.

           Icons
                          All embedded parts are displayed as icons (like a
                          folder in OS/2). Intrinsic data are not shown.

           Tree
                          The tree of embedded parts is shown. Parts are
                          displayed as icons in a tree. Initially only the
                          first level of the tree is displayed, but users may
                          open and close branches.

           Details
                          Shows a list of parts with their small icons and
                          information such as Name, Size, and Creation date.

 Properties
           Opens a Properties notebook on the active part.

 Actions related to the display frame borders follow:

 Show Frame Outline
           Appears in the View menu for embedded parts opened into a window.
           When invoked, an outline of the frame is shown to indicate the
           portion of a part's content displayed in its frame in the containing
           window. The user can drag this outline to adjust the visible region
           of the part. For more details, see Editing Frames. Toggles with Hide
           Frame Outline.

 Show links
           Shows the link border for all links in the active part. Toggles with
           Hide links.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.3. {Active Part} Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In OpenDoc, the active part's menu-bar choices display choices related to the
currently active part. These are not a standard menus. Part developers can add
these to the base menu-bar. Developers can add more than one active part menu,
with names appropriate to their contents. Choices that pertain to content
selected within the part should be separated from whole-part choices.  Notice
in the artwork that displays the pulldowns from the menu-bar, certain choices
are grouped together by the action they provide on the part.
Help Menu

In OS/2, the help menu behaves as defined in the Object-Oriented Interface
Design - IBM Common User Access Guidelines, except that in addition to the
Product Information menu, there is part information that the active part should
display. When a Windows** part is active the Help menu will contain the Windows
Help Manager** choices.

The Help menu contains choices for the active part. The mnemonic for Help is H.

Help Menu

 Help Index
           Index for the active part.

 General Help
           General help for the active part.

 Using Help
           Information about how to use the help facility.

 Tutorial
           Tutorial for the active part. This is an optional item, the part
           developer needs to add this menu item within the part.

 OpenDoc tutorial
           This choice leads to a tutorial about using OpenDoc.

 part information
           Information on the active part. This is an optional item; the part
           developer needs to add this to the menu items within the part.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. Pop-up Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A pop-up (or context) menu contains choices that are currently available for
the part under the pointer. Pop-up menus are provided to give the user
immediate access to the choices applicable to the content under the pointer.
For intrinsic data, the choices in the pop-up menu are determined by the part
handler of the selected data. The default mouse method of invoking a pop-up
menu in OS/2 is to click MB2. Clicking MB2 over a part that is not selected or
activated will move activation to that part and display a pop-up menu.

For actions on parts, there is a minimum set of actions that should be
supported by all parts. Parts can provide additional options, but all parts
should provide the following:

Pop-up Menu

The pop-up choices for parts follow:

 Open as->
           Cascades to a list of different views (for example, Icons, Details,
           Tree) available for the part.

 Properties
           Opens a Properties notebook on the part.

 Show as->
           Changes the representation of the source of the pop-up. A cascaded
           menu contains representations available for the part. If this
           setting is changed, the Show as setting in the part's Properties
           notebook is also changed since they are the same setting. Standard
           representations are Large icon, Small icon, Thumbnail, and Frame.
           The name Frame may be replaced with the names of the frame views
           supported. For example, the developer could have Chart and Table in
           the list. If there are many views you may put them into a cascaded
           menu called Frame.

 Help
           Cascaded menu for help choices (typically Index, General, Using
           Help, <Part> information.

 Parts should add the following choices, as applicable, to the pop-up menu:

 Note:  This is not a complete set of choices-developers should add any choices
        that are appropriate to the part.

 Create
           Creates a new part of the same type as the part under the pointer. A
           new part will be created on the clipboard.

 Cut
           Removes the part from its current position and places it on the
           clipboard. When followed by a Paste choice, this provides the Move
           operation. See Cut, Copy, Paste, and Create.

 Copy
           Leaves the part undisturbed as it places a copy of the part on the
           clipboard. When used with the Paste choice, this provides the Copy
           operation. See Cut, Copy, Paste, and Create.

 Paste
           Pastes the contents of the clipboard in the cursored position or in
           a default position in the target part. When used with the Cut and
           Copy choices, this provides the Move and Copy operations. See Cut,
           Copy, Paste, and Create.

 Paste As...
           Provides the same function as the Paste choice, but also displays a
           dialog box that allows the user to specify the data format for
           pasting the clipboard contents into the destination. Converts the
           clipboard contents to the user-specified format. Also, allows links
           it be created. When the Create choice is selected, and the Paste As
           choice is subsequently chosen, the Paste link pushbutton in the
           Paste As dialog should be grayed since linking is not possible at
           this point. See Linking Documents.

 Break link
           (For target links only) This choice will break the selected link
           with the source. The action cannot be undone. A confirmation dialog
           box will appear before the link is broken. See Linking Documents.

 Delete selection
           Removes the selection.

 The following information describes convenience actions:

 Print...
           Prints the source of the pop-up.

 Additional actions that can be performed on the part should also be listed in
 the pop-up menu. Related choices should be grouped together. If the container
 part's actions cannot be placed intelligently in the pop-up menu, they should
 appear after the part's actions and before the Help choice. Generally, the
 order of choices in the pop-up menu are:

     Choices that open new windows (for example, Open as and Properties)
     Clipboard/data transfer (for example, Cut, Paste, and Delete)
     Convenience choices
     Part specific actions
     Container actions (for example, Align)
     Help

 A divider appears in the menu between each category of choices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. Pop-up Menus and Multiple Selections ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If more than one part is selected and the pointer is on a part that is
selected, the pop-up menu contains the choices that apply to all of the
selected parts. In the first release of OpenDoc, limited support for this
feature is provided. There are three different cases to consider. Case 1 is
when the multiple selection includes intrinsic content only; case 2 is when
multiple embedded parts are only selected; and case 3 is when both intrinsic
content and embedded parts are selected.

In Case 1 the part editor should be able to provide the intersection of choices
that apply to all the selected intrinsic data.

In Case 2 where multiple embedded parts are selected, at a minimum, the pop-up
should provide the following actions:

 Open
           Opens the default view of each part.

 Properties
           Opens a Properties notebook for each part.

 Show as
           {Large icon, Small icon, Thumbnail, and Frame}

 Delete
           Deletes the pop-up's source, or all selected parts or content.

 The developer is free to add more choices to the pop-up menu like Align or
 Arrange that the container can perform on the parts.

 In Case 3, at a minimum any container choices (for example, Align) that can be
 performed on the selected parts should be displayed. Part editors can add more
 choices as long as they apply to the part.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. Pop-Up Menus and WorkPlace Shell Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Ideally, pop-up menus for an OpenDoc object on the Desktop should contain the
same actions that you would get when bringing up a pop-up menu from inside an
OpenDoc part. But because the WorkPlace Shell uses a different data-transfer
model than OpenDoc(**), and uses shadows instead of links, there will be some
differences between the pop-up menus depending on the context in which they are
displayed. For instance, OpenDoc part editors do not contribute to the
WorkPlace Shell menus.

There are several different kinds of sources for pop-up menus:

     An icon in a folder on the Desktop
     An opened OpenDoc document
     Contents of an opened OpenDoc document

 If the user brings up a pop-up menu from inside an OpenDoc document (for
 example, by clicking in the background of the root part) then the pop-up menu
 will contain the OpenDoc Clipboard and Link actions. Note that the Open as
 menu choice will list the available views for the part.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6.1. Window Menu not Supported ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Many applications include window menus to allow the user to find the documents
that are currently open within that application. Because each document is
treated as a separate process in OpenDoc, this function is available by
examining the Window List. Thus, a window menu is not required.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6.2. Plug-Ins and Services ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Plug-ins are functions that extend the capabilities of the document shell and
session-wide functionality of OpenDoc.

When a document is opened, the document shell will start all installed shell
plug-ins. When called by the document shell, a plug-in can add its own dispatch
or focus modules, add entries to the name spaces, or or patch session-wide
objects (like clipboard).

Note:  Part editor developers should implement plug-ins.

 Service components are mechanisms to extend the capabilities of parts. Menu
 items for actions provided by these services are the responsibility of the
 part editor using the services and should be added to the menu bar.

 OpenDoc components that provide services to parts' or documents'
 spell-checking or database access tools, when developed as service components,
 can be applied to a either a single part, all the parts of a document, or
 across several documents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. Window Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In many respects, OpenDoc windows resemble OS/2 WorkPlace Shell windows.
Windows are used to present views of documents or other parts. The two types of
windows are parent and child windows (or primary and secondary windows).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7.1. Parent Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A parent window is a document window opened on a root part. Because a parent
window is always a document window, the menu bar will contain the document menu
choices such as Save and Revert to Saved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7.2. Child Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A child window is a window opened on an embedded part. The child window carries
its own menu bar similar to that of the parent window, but lacking some of the
Document choices such as Save and Revert to Saved.

Opening and closing windows on a child part has no effect on the selection
state in its original document.

When a part is opened into a window, that part becomes the active part in the
window and displays its menus in the opened window. When a child-window is
closed, the source part should be in the same state that it was before it was
opened into a child-window, unless the user changed the selection in the window
from which the part was initially opened.

If the part has a name, it will appear in the title bar of the child window,
followed by its parent document name and the View name of the child window.
See Child-Window Title Bar.. Thus the title will have the following format:
<Name> from <Document name> - <View>

Truncation of the title, if needed, will start from the right.

If the user closes the parent window, any child windows associated with that
parent window will also close.

Child-Window Title Bar


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7.3. Window List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A window list is an OS/2 feature that shows users which windows are currently
open on their destop and provides access to those windows. The entries on the
window list are the title bar contents of each window.

Opened OpenDoc windows appear in the window list along with the WorkPlace Shell
windows. Embedded parts opened into their own windows and appear indented under
their parent document windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OpenDoc uses an object-oriented user model, where documents are objects that
contain other objects, and where each may have distinct behaviors. Each part
has contents, behavior, and a set of properties.

Properties are information about a part or intrinsic content. For example, a
file on the Desktop has properties such as name, kind, size, where and when it
was created. The text you are reading has properties such as font, size, style,
color, and spacing. A picture embedded in this document has properties such as
horizontal and vertical position relative to page, margin, text, or border.

Some part properties can be modified by users, while others may be set only by
developers or the system. There is a basic set of part properties that OpenDoc
expects each part to support. Developers are responsible for deciding which
additional properties to support. The basic set of properties is discussed in
the following section.

All the properties in the parts property notebook refer to part-specific
properties except the Bundled and View As properties, which refer to the
current frame or icon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. Part Kinds and Categories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In this section, two widely-used part properties are defined: kind and
category. These properties affect many aspects of the behavior of the part.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.1. Part Kind ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A part kind refers to the data format of a part's contents; for example,
AcmeSoft Text 8.0 or SurfWriter II. Developers initially assign part kinds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.2. Part Category ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A category refers to a set of part kinds.  A category describes the type of
data contained in a part, such as text.  Conceptually, a category groups part
kinds that users perceive as similar.  Users may think of a category as a
generic term for several brand name variants. For example, the category Styled
Text might include the kinds: SurfWriter 3.0, SurfWriter 2.0, and others.

Note:  SurfWriter is used as an example product set.

 Developers assign categories and they cannot be changed by users. OpenDoc uses
 categories to determine the set of part editors or viewers that are applicable
 to a given part.

 When users want to change the editor or viewer for a part, they need to see
 the valid alternatives. There may be hundreds of editors and viewers in the
 system, but the user interface displays only those that are applicable to the
 part. The system determines the subset to show by comparing the editor and
 viewer types with the part's category and filtering out the ones that do not
 match. See Part-Editor Properties.

 Categories are not hierarchical. A category cannot include other categories.
 If a part can accept multiple categories of data, the categories must be
 listed individually in the Category property, separated by commas (for
 example, Plain Text, Styled Text).
 Initial categories

 The following initial set of categories for OpenDoc parts is suggested.

 Developers are free to define additional categories. It is up to developers to
 agree on the categories among themselves; Component Integration Laboratories
 will coordinate the process.

  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
  Γöé plain text         Γöé script           Γöé
  Γö£              Γöé              Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé styled text        Γöé outline          Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé 2D graphics        Γöé page layout        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé 3D graphics        Γöé presentation        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé bitmapped graphics     Γöé communication       Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé movie           Γöé table           Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé controls (ex: button)   Γöé sound           Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé spreadsheet        Γöé Database          Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Calendar          Γöé Dictionaries        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Form            Γöé Executable         Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé bitmapped graphics     Γöé Compressed (ex: ARC, ZIP) Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Folders          Γöé Control Panels       Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Utilities         Γöé Person (ex: Business    Γöé
  Γöé              Γöé Card)           Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Workspace (Desktop, Room) Γöé Math & Statistics     Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Unknown (undefined kind  Γöé              Γöé
  Γöé of content)        Γöé              Γöé
  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.3. User-modifiable Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These basic properties can be modified by the user:

 Name
           A string of text identifying the part. The name is displayed as the
           icon label as well as in the window title when the part is opened
           into its own window. It can be used in scripts to refer to the part.
           The same naming rules that are used in the WorkPlace Shell will also
           apply in OpenDoc. The user is not required to name parts; default
           names can be constructed dynamically as needed, usually for
           scripting purposes.

 Template
           A Boolean check box: ON means that the part behaves as a template;
           OFF means that it behaves as an ordinary part.

 Comment
           A text string containing descriptive information about the part.
           This is purely for the user's benefit and has no meaning to the
           system.

 Bundled
           A Boolean check box: ON means that the frame's contents cannot be
           modified directly by the user; OFF means that they are modifiable. A
           bundled frame's contents cannot be selected or modified directly by
           the user. However, its contents can be changed indirectly by a
           script, link, or other means. The bundled property, unlike most
           other basic properties, applies only to the current representation
           of the part and not to the part itself.

 Kind
           A text string displaying the part's data format. For example;
           SurfWriter 3.2 or SurfDraw 1.9. The user can change the kind of a
           part by selecting an existing alternative format of data, which is
           displayed in a drop-down list. See Properties for more information.

 Editor
           A pointer to the editor that the user prefers to use on this part's
           content. By default, it is the last editor used on this part's
           content. When users inspect the editors available, they see a see a
           filtered list containing only those editors and viewers in the
           system that can handle the part's kind. The user can select either a
           viewer or an editor from the list to replace the one associated with
           the part. If the preferred editor is not available at some point,
           the system-wide editor properties control substitution.

 Show as
           A one-of-many property (large icon, small icon, thumbnail,
           frame(**)) that specifies the preferred representation of displaying
           the part. The developer can add other names of methods.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.4. Non-Modifiable Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Users can not modify these properties directly.

 Category
           A text string displaying the part's category. A category is a
           general classification of a part's contents. It describes the type
           of data contained in the part (for example,Text). The property can
           contain more than one category separated by commas; for example
           Text, Styled Text. See Part Kinds and Categories for more
           information.

 Created
           The date and time the part was created. The time is not reset by
           Copy operations; the copy has the same creation date as the
           original.

 Modified
           The date and time the part was last modified.

 By
           A text string identifying the user who caused the last modification.
           This is optional.

 Size
           A number representing the number of bytes required to store the part
           in the file system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.5. Properties Developers Define ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Developers can choose to add pages to the Properties notebook. For example,
pages that specify the background color of a window or whether a grid is on or
off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.6. Multiple Frames and Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If a part is represented by more than one frame, each frame should have its own
Properties notebook. The properties of the object should be divided into object
properties (properties that affect the data) and view properties (properties
that affect how the data is displayed). Changing object properties will be
reflected in all frames of the part. Changing view properties will change just
the frame from which the properties choice was chosen. If multiple frames exist
for a single part, and Properties notebooks are opened on each frame, each
frame will show its Properties notebook. Any change to the object portion of
the notebook will immediately be shown in all of the notebooks for that part.
It is up to the parts to decide what properties are view properties. In the
basic set, Show as is the only view property.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.7. Viewing and Changing Part Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To view and change properties for a part, the user selects Properties from a
menu associated with the part. A Properties notebook appears, in which the user
can see the part's current properties, and make changes to the user-modifiable
properties. Properties that change in OS/2 are applied immediately. However, in
OpenDoc, changes are applied when the notebook is closed.

Part Properties Notebook - Type page

Part Properties Notebook -View page 1 - Show as

Part Properties Notebook - Comments page

Part Properties Notebook - General page


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.8. Changing Icons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A part's icon is changed in the same manner as a WorkPlace Shell icon.
Developers can either use the Create another, Edit, or Find pushbuttons or any
icon can be dropped on top of the current icon within the General page of the
Properties notebook, and it will change to the dropped icon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.9. Renaming a Part ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The user can rename parts either by modifying the Name attribute in the
Properties notebook for that part, or by directly editing the part's icon
label.

The second method is an optimization for the standard first method. This is an
example of an accelerator to change a single property. Developers can add
others that make sense for their data kind. All containing parts need to
support icon text placement and manipulation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.10. Part Properties Notebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Every part, whether it is a root part or an embedded part, has its own
properties notebook. The Properties notebook can be accessed at any time. To
change the properties for a root part, the user would choose Properties from
the Document menu.  To change the properties for an embedded part, the user
would select Properties from a pop-up menu, or activate the part and choose
Properties from the View menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. Part-Editor Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part-editor properties control the behavior of the editor used to edit a
particular part. In addition, the part editor can provide choices that affect
the part contents as a whole, rather than some specific selected content. For
example, a particular editor may support specialized printing options. OpenDoc
refers to these properties as settings. The available settings and the
mechanism for changing the properties varies according to the editor being
used. Editor properties appear as additional pages in the part's Properties
notebook. This section describes the general mechanism that should be used, but
developers should decide on the set of properties to support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1. Properties of the Part Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Each part editor is responsible for presenting its properties to the user
through the Properties notebook. The editor pages will be added to the
Properties notebook of each part associated with this editor. To modify
properties, users use the Editor pages of the part's Properties notebook.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2. Settings of the Part Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This function is not available in this release. This is for information only.

 Because one editor may support dozens of settings while another might support
 none, OpenDoc does not specify a required set of settings. However, there are
 some settings that will be common to a large percentage of editors. These
 settings are called the Standard Set.

 The Standard Set includes:

     Print Options

      The Print Options dialog is provided by the editor application in
      conjunction with the printing software.

     Script


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3. Inclusions List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If a part developer finds it necessary to disallow certain kinds of parts from
being embedded in the part being developed, the developer can use an Inclusions
list to specify which kinds of parts are allowed to be embedded. This
information would be a page in the part's Properties notebook. It is not
recommended that part developers set up Inclusions lists since the purpose of
OpenDoc is to allow different types of data to co-exist in the same document.
The default is everything allowed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. Editor Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  The following information is for planning purposes only, it is not
       available in this release of OpenDoc.

 Each editor is represented by an Editor object. Editor properties can be
 changed by opening the Editor object and changing one of the editor
 properties. The Editor object can also be used to uninstall the editor from
 the system. If a user attempts to delete this object, a dialog box will be
 displayed asking if the editor should be uninstalled from the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1. Editor Preference Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There will be one object that contains all of the installed editors and their
preferences. The name of this object is Editor Preferences. If a user opens
this object, a Properties notebook will be shown with a list of kinds and their
associated editors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Interactions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Users interact with Opendoc parts in several ways.  This chapter describes
those interactions and selection techniques.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. Displaying Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

From the WorkPlace Shell Desktop, objects must be opened into windows in order
to be edited. But in OpenDoc, it is not necessary to open a part into its own
window to edit it. A part displayed as frame can be edited in place. However,
any part can also be opened into a separate window. When a part is embedded,
choosing Open as from an associated menu opens the part into a window of its
own. Double-clicking on an icon, frame, or the background of a part can be used
as an accelerator for the Open as {default view} choice. Selecting Close in the
Window menu (or double-clicking on the Window menu graphic) closes the window.
When the window is opened, its size and location are the same as the last time
it was closed; if this is the first time the window is opened, default values
are used.

If a part is opened into a window, and then Cut, the window is closed and is
not re-opened at paste time. However, if such a frame is moved (by
drag-and-drop) within the document, the window remains visible. A window
showing a selected frame's contents. shows a part frame opened into a window.
This provides two simultaneous views of the part's contents.

Opening a selected part by choosing Open as

A window showing a selected frame's contents

Any part should support opening into a window of its own. It is up to the
developer to supply the Open as view choices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. Changing Part Representations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A unique characteristic of OpenDoc is that parts can be represented as either
icons or frames. This section describes how to change the representation of a
part from a frame to an icon and an icon to a frame. Developers should provide
the necessary information to support Icons view, Tree view, or Details view
from a container.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1. Show As Frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To show a part as a frame, the user can choose Show as -> Frame from an
associated menu, or change the Show as attribute to Frame in the part's
Properties notebook.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2. Show As Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To show a part as an icon, the user can choose Show as -> Icon from an
associated menu or change the Show as attribute to Icon in the part's
Properties notebook.

Show as chosen from a pop-up menu

The selected part appears as a frame, replacing the icon

Changing a part's representation causes one representation to be replaced by
another. After a representation change, the location of the part generally
remains the same, although some containers can change it, such as a graphics
part that could align it to a grid. The containing part determines whether or
not the layout of its contents (for example, text) is adjusted to accommodate
the change. If the representation change results in a frame, as much of the
content as can fit is displayed inside the frame. The frame's size is the same
as the last time it was displayed; if this is the first time, a default size is
used. The user can adjust the size by selecting the frame and using the sizing
borders.

Changing the representation of an embedded part has no effect on any views it
might have opened in other windows. For example, when changing the
representation of a frame to an icon, the part remains open and an icon appears
where the frame used to be with the appropriate in-use emphasis. See A part's
icon being dragged into a text document. and The part is represented as a frame
inside the document..

A part's icon being dragged into a text document

The part is represented as a frame inside the document

Athough any part can be represented as a frame, at a given time a part might
not have that ability because its current editor or viewer does not support
displaying the part's content. Such parts do not have a frame representation,
and the Show As Frame operation is not available for them. Whenever such a part
is asked to display itself as a frame, for example, when it is dragged into a
document window, it remains an icon. An example might be a sound part that can
be played but not displayed when its icon is double-clicked. However, switching
editors for the sound part might allow it to be displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.3. Hierarchy of Preferred Representation for Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Every container view has a preferred representation for the parts it contains.
Preferred representation determines whether contained parts are represented as
icons, small icons, thumbnails, or frames in the containing part. For example,
when a part icon is dropped into an open document, the part displays itself as
a frame. Likewise, when a part frame is dropped onto the Desktop its
representation changes to an icon. When a part is placed into a container, it
will take the container's preferred representation for its contained parts.
However, the user may change the contained parts representation through its
Properties notebook. The developer determines the initial setting for a
container's preferred representation.

When a part is placed into a container whose preferred representation is
different from the current representation of the part, the part's
representation should change to match its container's preferences. If the part
does not support the container's preferred representation it should use its
current representation. If the current representation cannot be used, the part
should be represented by an icon. In any case, the setting for Show as should
accurately reflect the part's current representation. Where possible,
containers should allow users to override this setting on a part-by-part basis.
For example, if a container part is set up in icon view, and a user selects one
of the embedded parts and changes its representation to frame, the container
should honor this change.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. Selecting Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selection in OpenDoc is to be consistent with the current selection model in
OS/2. Selection is explicitly set by the user while activation is implicit
wherever possible. Explicit activation is supported for cases where it is
required or is more convenient-because selection always causes activation of
the selection's container.

In the OS/2 WorkPlace Shell, a user can manipulate objects without first
selecting them. By default, mouse button 1 (MB1) is mapped to selection, and
mouse button 2 (MB2) is mapped to manipulation. However, users can change these
defaults. This concept is followed in OpenDoc.

Note:  Developers should never look for raw mouse events, instead look for
       semantic level messages.

 The following recommendations for selection should be followed for parts
 themselves. Selection within parts should follow the appropriate guidelines in
 the Object-Oriented Interface Design - IBM Common User Access Guidelines.

 As described in Part Icons and Part Frames, a part has two possible types of
 representations: icon and frame. Each representation provides a means of
 selecting a part as a whole.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.1. Selecting a Part Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select a part icon the user places the pointer over the icon and clicks MB1.
The icon becomes selected and displays Selected emphasis.

Any kind of icon (large icon, small icon, thumbnail) can be selected in any
kind of container. An icon can be selected even when its part is opened into a
window. The user simply clicks MB1 on the icon. The user can select multiple
parts by pressing the Shift or the Ctrl key while clicking MB1 to add parts to
the selected set. In some environments, marquee selection is also supported. To
marquee-select, the user presses MB1 outside of the area to be included and
drags the mouse pointer (thereby creating a box) around the desired elements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.2. Selecting a Part Frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selection in OpenDoc follows an inside-out model; that is, a simple MB1 click
selects the lowest-level selectable item under the pointer. In user-editable
parts, this simple click will select some content of a part. If a user wants to
select an entire part rather than its content, he may either click MB1 on the
active frame border, marquee-select the part (by stretching a selection box
around the part), or hold down the Shift key while clicking MB1.

Unselected and Selected Frames
Note that unselected, inactive frames such as the ruler can have
invisible borders.

In general, whenever the user clicks MB1 in a part frame, the frame becomes
active. If the part does not support activation, then it becomes selected and
its parent container is activated. Parts that do not support activation are
those that have been bundled or those that are provided as simple parts.

Note:  Alt+MB1 has some new behavior and should work as follows (OpenDoc does
       not provide this function, part developers should implement it):

     Pressing Alt+MB1 promotes selection up one level, causing the
      currently-active part to become selected, and its container to become
      active. Each repeated action of pressing Alt+MB1 should promote selection
      up one level.

 To select a part represented as a frame, the user should:

   1. Click MB1 in the part's contents. This action activates the frame and
      shows its borders.
   2. Click MB1 on the border.

 Or:

   1. Click anywhere inside a bundled frame.

      When a part is bundled, a mouse click anywhere inside its frame selects
      the part. Bundled parts act like atomic objects; their contents cannot be
      selected and they cannot be activated.

 Or: Press either Alt, Shift, or Ctrl, and MB1 on a part that is embedded in an
 active container.

 Or:

   1. Perform actions supplied by the containing part, such as including the
      embedded part in a selection box by using the marquee selection
      technique.

  Selecting a frame by clicking on the active border

 In each case, the frame becomes selected(**). When a frame is selected, its
 container becomes active and displays active emphasis.

  Part Borders

 Selection can include only contents of the active part. All members of the
 selected set must be at the same level of embedding within the active part.
 Selection cannot extend outside of the active part.

 In addition to these selection techniques, developers can provide other frame
 selection methods that are appropriate to the types of parts. For example, a
 graphics part might provide a lasso tool, a text part might allow selecting
 with the cursor keys, and a folder part might allow selecting by typing the
 first letter of embedded parts' names.

 A frame can be selected even when its underlying part is opened into a window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.3. Selecting a Part's Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Users do not have to explicitly activate a part before selecting its contents.
Regardless of what part is currently active or what the current selection is,
they can make a new selection by clicking in the window or frame of any part.

OpenDoc follows an inside-out model in determining what to select. When the
user presses the mouse button inside a part, the lowest level element of
content under the pointer is selected. For example, if the user clicks on some
text in a label frame inside a chart frame that is inside a graphic frame, the
user gets an insertion point in the text in the label and the label frame
becomes activated. If the click is not inside a frame but is at the top level
of a window, the top-level part handles the click.

Today, different applications use different selection schemes, depending on the
type of data. In OpenDoc, developers define the selection methods for a part's
contents.  However, OpenDoc proposes a set of uniform selection guidelines for
parts in order to improve the consistency of selecting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.4. Selecting Multiple Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select multiple parts the user should do the following:

   1. Press and hold down the Ctrl key.
   2. Click MB1 on multiple icons or frames.

 Or:

   1. Press and hold down MB1 over a part icon, then continue to hold down MB1
      while moving the pointer across other parts within an active part.

 Or:

 For parts that have "white space" (like a folder on the WorkPlace Shell):

   1. Press and hold down MB1 over white space.
   2. Move the pointer, thereby defining a marquee selection around the icons
      or frames.
   3. Release the mouse button.

 Or for containers that have a defined order (i.e., there is a 1st element and
 a 2nd element):

   1. Select an icon or frame.
   2. Press the Shift key and click MB1 on another icon or frame to select the
      range (all the items in between will also be selected).

 Using the Ctrl key with a MB1 click adds the frame to the current selection
 possibly creating a multiple selection. The Ctrl key also allows discontiguous
 selections. Users should think of the Ctrl key as the modifier key that always
 selects a whole part. selecting. Clicking anywhere in a frame with the Ctrl
 key (or the Shift key) down always selects the entire frame, even if it is
 "hot" (for example a button). See Selecting Hot Parts for more information.

 The selected icons and frames must all be in the same active containing part,
 for example in the same document window, and they must be siblings of each
 other (at the same level of embedding). Selection cannot exist inside two
 parts simultaneously.

 When the user draws a marquee-selection on the screen, all icons or frames
 that are completely inside the rectangle are added to the selection. This
 technique is shown in the following figure.

  Marquee-selection

 Note that all multiple selections are considered to be intrinsic content
 selections and follow the editing rules for them (see Cut, Copy, Paste, and
 Create). Clicking MB1 anywhere in a part's contents (not in a scroll bar,
 menu, or palette) with no modifier keys (Shift, Alt, or Ctrl), resets the
 selection. Clicking anywhere outside the active part even with modifier keys
 also resets the selection. There is only one selection set per window. When a
 window becomes inactive, it is recommended that the selection remain visible,
 using 50% white in the selection emphasis, to allow dragging of contents and
 parts.

 Icons and frames can be freely mixed within a container since they are both
 representations of parts. Therefore, a multiple selection might include a
 mixture of icons, frames, and intrinsic contents. Consider the following
 examples:

  A mixture of icons and frames selected in a container

  An extended text selection including an icon and a frame

  The same frame selected by itself in the same text container

 In a graphics container the mechanism for showing selections might be very
 different:

  Example of a multiple selection


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.5. Selecting All the Contents of a Part ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the contents of a part the user should do the following:

   1. Activate a part.
   2. Select Select All from the Edit or pop-up menu.

 All the contents of the active part become selected. If the active part is the
 top-level part in a window, all the contents of the window become selected.

 Note that selecting all the contents of a part is not the same as selecting
 the part itself. If users want to insert the contents of a part into another
 part, they should select all the contents. If they want to embed a part into
 another part, they should drag or paste the part as a whole.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.6. Selecting Hot Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Certain hot parts, such as buttons and sounds, execute code or perform some
other action when they are clicked on with the selection button (MB1). This
means they cannot be selected with an unaugmented click of MB1. However, MB2
can bring up a pop-up menu to perform actions on them, or a user can:

   1. Press and hold down the Alt key.
   2. Click MB1 on the hot part.

 Or:

   1. Press and hold down the Ctrl key.
   2. Click MB1 on the hot part.

 Or:

   1. Press and hold down the mouse button while the pointer is outside of the
      hot part.
   2. Move the pointer over the hot part, thereby defining a marquee rectangle.

 In text, the user can place the mouse pointer just to the left of the hot part
 and drag to the right side of it, thereby selecting the part without clicking
 on it. Note that intervening items might become selected. The user might have
 to toggle the unwanted items out of the selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4. Activating a Frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OpenDoc considers the container of the contents being edited to be the active
part. There are well defined rules for making a part active or inactive and for
providing visual feedback so that the user knows which part is active.

To activate a part the user should click MB1 in an unbundled frame. See
Selecting Parts about the Alt+MB1 selection process.

As with selecting part contents, OpenDoc follows an inside-out model in
determining which frame to activate:  when the user clicks the mouse button,
OpenDoc activates the lowest-level frame that contains the pointer location.
For example, if the user selects some text in a label frame inside a chart
frame inside a graphic frame, the label frame becomes active, as shown in the
following figure:

Activating the label frame by selecting text

Generally, a frame becomes active and its border appears as soon as the
selection mouse button is pressed in it. However, there are exceptions, such as
when the pointer is over a bundled frame, in which case the frame is selected.

When a part is activated, its menus, palettes and other user interface features
are displayed. In addition, if it is represented as a frame, the frame's border
is displayed, as shown in An embedded graphics part is selected. However, if a
part is the top-level part in a window its frame border is not displayed. The
part's active state is indicated by its active window border (see A text
top-level part is active and its menu is displayed).

When selection is begun in an embedded part that is not active, the active
border moves to the part that contains the selection. See Selecting Parts for
more information.

An embedded graphics part is selected
Its border, menu, and palette are displayed.

A text top-level part is active and its menu is displayed
Its border is not displayed.

During the drag operation, as soon as the pointer enters a frame, the receiving
part displays target emphasis. This border serves as target feedback for the
drag operation. The appearance of the insertion cursor (if any) is controlled
by the container, as is the exact placement of the dropped part.

Dragging a triangle

Pointer and triangle enter second window
The part activation is unchanged, the target emphasis is
around the leaf graphic part.

Target emphasis moves to the text frame

Triangle is embedded within text part
The text part controls making room for the drawing part.

When the mouse button is released, the dragged item is inserted in the active
frame, and target emphasis disappears. Note that drag and drop should not
change selection or activation.

Some frames have valid target regions that are smaller than the entire frame.
In this case the user sees the target emphasis only within the valid target
regions. If the user attempts to drop an item in an invalid location, the item
is rejected, returns to its original location, and remains in whatever
selection state it was in prior to the drag.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4.1. Keyboard Navigation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Part developers should implement keyboard navigation to support activation for
the following key combinations:

     Alt+UpArrow and Alt+DownArrow moves the cursor (and activation) up and
      down in the hierarchy of part containment.

        -  Alt+UpArrow moves activation up (activates the currently active
           part's container) and places the cursor where it last resided in the
           newly active container. Repeated Alt+UpArrows continue to promote
           activation until the top-level part in the window is active. When
           the top-level part is active, Alt+UpArrow should have no effect.

        -  Alt+DownArrow (when the cursor is over a part that supports internal
           navigation) should move activation down one level and place the
           cursor in its last (or default) position. Alt+DownArrow, when the
           cursor is not over a part supporting internal navigation, should
           have no effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4.2. Deactivating a Frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To deactivate a frame the user can click MB1 outside the frame border within
the client area of its container window.

The active frame becomes inactive. Its border disappears, and it no longer
receives keyboard events. The lowest level frame in which the pointer is now
located becomes active. Clicking in the menu bar, scroll bar, tool bar, or
other user-interface element does not deactivate a frame; only clicks in the
contents of some other part do so.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4.3. Surfacing Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Whenever the user selects something in a window, either in the top-level part
of the window or in an embedded part, the window containing the selection
becomes the active window, and is brought to the top of the stack of windows on
the screen so that it is completely visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5. Editing Frames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section expands on operations that apply to frames. Note that a part might
have more than one frame, as described in Part Frames.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.1. Changing the Frame Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the size of a frame the user should do the following:

   1. Select a frame.
   2. Position the pointer over a resize handle on the border.
   3. Press and hold down either mouse button.
   4. Move the pointer to a new location.
   5. Release the mouse button.

  Changing a frame's size by dragging a resize handle

 In addition to this direct-manipulation technique, a frame's size can also be
 changed programatically, for example, by a script.  See Scripting for more
 information about scripting. The containing part determines how many resize
 handles appear when a frame is selected. Some containers might display fewer
 resize handles than others, perhaps none if the container does not allow the
 frame's size to be changed.  For example, in a graphics part, an embedded part
 might have eight handles, while in a text part it might have four.

 In addition to controlling how many handles appear, the containing part also
 controls how much space a frame occupies. When a frame attempts to change
 size, it negotiates with its container about the new size. The container can
 grant the requested size, reduce it, or refuse altogether, depending on its
 current contents and other constraints such as gridding. The container also
 determines whether to adjust the layout of its other contents (for example,
 reflowing text), when a frame's size changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.2. Pointer Feedback for Changing Frame Shape ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The resize handles provide pointer feedback to help the user understand the
location and behavior of the border. As the user moves the pointer over any of
the handles on a selected frame, the pointer shape changes to the OS/2
double-pointed resizing arrow. This shape indicates that the frame's size may
be stretched or reduced from that point. The new frame shape appears as an
outline until the resize has been completed, and the mouse button has been
released.

Some containers can require that embedded frames be rectangular; their resize
handles resize only their rectangular areas. Others can allow embedded frames
to be non-rectangular. These containers are responsible for putting an
appropriate number of resize handles on a frame's border and interpreting drag
actions on them.

A simple part frame with a rectangular border


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.3. The Visible Region of a Frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The visible region of a frame is a graphic indication (indicated by an outline)
of the portion of a part's contents that is displayed in a frame. The visible
region is indicated by an outline within the window opened on an embedded part.

To change the visible region of a frame the user should do the following:

   1. Open a frame into a window.
   2. If the frame outline is not already visible, Choose Show Frame Outline
      from the View menu in the new window; the frame's outline appears
      indicating the region visible in the container's window.
   3. Drag the frame outline to include the desired portion of the part
      window's contents.

 The newly-included portion of the part will appear inside the part's frame in
 the document window.

  Setting a frame's visible region
  The frame on the right
  has been opened into the window on the left.

 When the pointer is over the outline, the cursor shape changes to a moving
 arrow. The user presses MB2 on it and drags it to move the area of inclusion
 in the visible region. The frame's contents change dynamically as the frame
 outline moves around. The user can also choose Hide Frame Outline from the
 View menu to disable the display of the outline.

 In the prevous figure, the document on the right contains text and a
 spreadsheet frame. The user has opened the spreadsheet frame into a window.
 The user has selected the Show Frame Outline choice in the View menu. The
 part's visible region indicator appeared. This is the full-intensity rectangle
 in the lower cells of the window. The user has placed the pointer over this
 border; the cursor shape changed into a resizing arrow. The user then drags
 the frame outline within the window to change the visible area. It is
 constrained to stay within the window. Since the frame is visible on the
 screen, the composed document dynamically updates to show whatever the frame
 outline currently includes.

 A visible region outline has the same size and shape as the associated frame.
 Its size and shape cannot be changed directly. The only way to change them is
 by changing the frame itself (with resize handles) within the container's
 window. This is because the containing part determines its embedded part's
 frame size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6. Cut, Copy, Paste, and Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Cut, Copy, Paste, and Create choices are familiar to users of GUIs. These
choices are the traditional mechanisms used to copy and move content around in
the system. Refer to the Object-Oriented Interface Design - IBM Common User
Access Guidelines for additional information about these functions. In OpenDoc,
these choices continue to operate similarly, but with some additional
functionality, to handle embedded parts.

The additional functionality consists of:

     Operating on parts as well as intrinsic content. The parts can be
      represented as frames, large icons, small icons, or thumbnails.
     Making embed-versus-incorporate decisions.
     Wrappering intrinsic content inside a part in certain circumstances.

 The user will usually want the system to make the decisions automatically when
 performing these functions. However, the user can override these decisions by
 choosing a new menu choice, Paste As.... This choice is described later in
 this section.

 If the user copies or moves a part, the copy or move contains all the data
 currently in the part, including any edits that have not been saved.

 The clipboard choice, Create (similar to the New choice in many of today's
 applications) has been added allowing users to create new parts and place them
 on the clipboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.1. Create Choice ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Create choice is used to place a new part on the clipboard of the same kind
as the part selected. This differs from Copy in that a new part is created that
does not include the content of the source part.

To place new part on a clipboard the user can select a part of the desired kind
and:

   1. Choose Create from an associated menu.
   2. Choose a target.
   3. Choose Paste from the Edit or pop-up menu of the target.

 Or:

   1. Use drag-and-drop equivalents (see Drag-and-Drop Data Transfer
      Techniques).

 Note:  If multiple parts are selected, a new part is created for each selected part.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.2. Copy Choice ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copy is used to copy intrinsic data or make a new part of the original part's
kind that carries the original part's contents.

To copy parts, the user chooses Copy from a menu associated with the original
part.

   1. Select a part or part contents.
   2. Choose Copy from the Edit or pop-up menu.
   3. Select a target.
   4. Choose Paste from the Edit or pop-up menu.

 Or:

   1. Use drag-and-drop equivalents (see Drag-and-Drop Data Transfer
      Techniques).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.3. Cut Choice ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Cut choice is used to remove selections and place them in the Clipboard so
that they can later be pasted.

To move selections to the clipboard:

   1. Choose Cut from a menu associated with the desired part or intrinsic
      data.
   2. Select a target.
   3. Choose Paste from the Edit or pop-up menu.

 Or:

   1. Use drag-and-drop equivalents. Drag the selection to the clipboard (see
      Drag-and-Drop Data Transfer Techniques).

 When the Cut choice is selected, the cut item disappears from its old
 location. When the Paste choice is selected, the cut item appears at the new
 location. If the source and target are the same part, the Cut and Paste
 operation simply repositions it. If the source and target are different parts,
 the cut items change containers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.4. Copy or Move Within a Part ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copying or moving content within a part amounts to editing the contents of a
single part and therefore is largely the province of the part developer. Each
part controls the editing of its intrinsic contents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.5. Copy or Move Between Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following section describes the default behaviors of Copy or Move between
parts.

Every part has its own kind of intrinsic contents. For example, text parts
contain text characters, graphic parts contain graphic elements. The following
cases illustrate the default results of copying or moving content between
parts. See Incorporate versus Embed Default Decision Summary for a summary of
these defaults.

     Case 1

      The source and target parts are the same kind of part. The select   ion
      is simply incorporated into the contents of the target part. For example,
      if both parts are text parts, the selected text is incorporated into the
      target's text at the insertion point, and becomes intrinsic content of
      the target part. The next two figures illustrate this behavior.

            Selected text copied between documents of the same kind

            A copy of the text is incorporated into the target

      In the previous example, the text was copied to My Doc and inserted into
      the contents of that document.  Note that the source is still selected.
      The newly inserted text is not selected because if it were, the user
      might accidentally type over the new paste. If the target had been any
      other kind of part, for example graphics, the pasted text would have
      remained selected as detailed in Case 3.

     Case 2

      The source and target parts are different kinds, but the target part can
      handle the category of the selection. For example, if the source and
      target are text parts that store text in different formats, the selected
      text is converted to the target's format and then inserted into the
      target text. A common situation is copying text from a rich text editor,
      such as SurfWriter Text, to the simple text in a dialog box; the user
      does not want a part to be created and embedded within the dialog box
      text.

            Text converted to plain text
            Plain text inserted into
            the dialog box text part - its style properties are stripped out and it
            reflows itself.

     Case 3

      The source and target parts are different kinds, and the target part
      cannot handle the category of the selection.  OpenDoc creates a new part
      of the same kind as the source part, inserts the selection in it, and
      embeds the new part in the target part.  For example, some text pasted
      into a painting would not be converted into a collection of bits.
      Instead, the text would be encapsulated inside a text part. Then the text
      part would be embedded into the target.

 This protocol supports the goal of preserving, wherever possible, all
 relationships among moved elements, including spatial relationships and links.
 For example, if several circles and rectangles are selected and moved, they
 have the same appearance at the target regardless of which of the above cases
 applies. However, preserving spatial relationships is not always possible; for
 example, text content is usually reflowed.

  Text in Text Document-Composed is selected and copied

  A copy of the text is encapsulated in a new text part
  The new text part is the same kind
  as the source. The new part is embedded in the graphics document, and the
  new part is then selected.
 In the previous example, because the text was embedded into a part other than
 text, it cannot be deleted by over-typing.  Therefore it remains selected
 after insertion to facilitate adjustment of its position, size, etc.

 Note:  Pressing the Alt key during a drag operation forces the dragged content
        to be embedded as a separate part in the containing part. For example,
        if a text part's content is being dragged into another text part,
        pressing the Alt key during the drag operation will force the dragged
        content to be embedded as a text part rather than be incorporated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.6. Copying or Moving a Single Part ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Suppose the user copies a single whole part to another part, either by using
the Clipboard or by dragging it. The entire selected part is copied and
embedded as a unit into the target part. The copied part's structure as a part
is preserved. If the target part is of the same kind as the source container,
any container-assigned properties are changed to conform to the new container;
these properties can vary from container to container.

The part takes on the preferred representation specified by the target. Thus,
if the target prefers to represent its contents as frames, the copied part
appears as a frame.  Likewise, if the target prefers to represent its contents
as icons, the copied part appears as an icon. See Hierarchy of Preferred
Representation for Parts for more information.

The intent of making single part selections a special case is to give users the
ability to embed any part in any other part, regardless of the kinds of parts.
This is handy in Cases 1 and 2 on pages Copy or Move Between Parts and Copy or
Move Between Parts, in which the copied part is compatible with the target
part.  For example, if the user wants to embed a SurfWriter text part into a
FooWrite text part, the user can select the Surfwriter part as a whole and copy
or move it into the FooWrite part. The Surfwriter part is embedded as an
independent part in the FooWrite part, preserving its nature as a Surfwriter
part. Alternatively, the user can merge the text of a Surfwriter part into a
FooWrite part by selecting the contents of the Surfwriter part (for example,
with Select all) and copying or moving them into the FooWrite part. The
Surfwriter text is converted to FooWrite text and inserted into it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.7. Copying or Moving Multiple Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When the user selects more than one part, with or without any of the containing
part's intrinsic content, this selection is treated as an intrinsic-content
selection.

If the target is the same document as the source, then the parts are simply
repositioned in it. If the target is on a removable drive or a LAN drive, then
the parts are copied. The target may adjust the specified location based on
constraints such as gridding in a graphics part (or where text exists in a text
part). If the user presses MB2 anywhere within a selection, the complete
selection is dragged. Even if the pointer is over an embedded part within the
selected scope, OpenDoc assumes the user wants to want to drag all the selected
objects and not just the part under the pointer. For instance, the selection is
encapsulated in a wrapper part of the same kind as the containing source part,
and the new part is then embedded in the target part. This preserves the
spatial and other relationships among the selected parts. See the following
figures.

Copying a multiple selection from a folder into a text
document

The multiple selection is encapsulated in a new folder part
The new folder part is inserted into the text.

     In Cases 1 and 2 on pages Copy or Move Between Parts and Copy or Move
      Between Parts, the wrapper part is not necessary and the selected parts
      are embedded directly into the target part. For example, if several part
      icons are copied from one folder window to another, they appear as
      separate icons in the target folder, because the source and target are
      the same kind of part. See the following figures.

  Moving a multiple selection from one folder to another

  Source and target parts of the same type

 Because the target is the same type of part as the source, the selection need
 not be encapsulated in a new folder part.

 Thus, there is a difference between copying a single part and copying multiple
 parts. The single part is always embedded as the default action (although the
 user can override this action with the Paste As dialog option) while multiple
 parts and intrinsic content can be embedded or incorporated, depending on the
 source and target kinds.

 These behaviors of moving between parts are summarized in the following table.
 The first column lists various selections one could make in a part, the second
 column compares the target and source parts, and the third lists how the
 selection is deposited in the target.

  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
  Γöé  Table 1.  Incorporate versus Embed Default Decision Summary      Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé SELECTION       Γöé TARGET PART      Γöé ACTION         Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé intrinsic contents   Γöé same kind as source  Γöé incorporate      Γöé
  Γöé            Γöé part          Γöé            Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé intrinsic contents   Γöé different kind, com-  Γöé translate and incor-  Γöé
  Γöé            Γöé patible category    Γöé porate (not in this  Γöé
  Γöé            Γöé            Γöé release)        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé intrinsic contents   Γöé different kind,    Γöé encapsulate into same Γöé
  Γöé            Γöé incompatible category Γöé kind of part as    Γöé
  Γöé            Γöé            Γöé source and embed    Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé single part (any    Γöé any kind        Γöé embed         Γöé
  Γöé kind)         Γöé            Γöé            Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé multiple parts (any  Γöé same kind as source  Γöé incorporate      Γöé
  Γöé kinds)         Γöé part          Γöé            Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé multiple parts (any  Γöé different kind, com-  Γöé translate and incor-  Γöé
  Γöé kinds)         Γöé patible category    Γöé porate (not in this  Γöé
  Γöé            Γöé            Γöé release)        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé multiple parts (any  Γöé different kind,    Γöé encapsulate into same Γöé
  Γöé kinds)         Γöé incompatible category Γöé kind of part as    Γöé
  Γöé            Γöé            Γöé source and embed    Γöé
  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.8. Copying or Moving Onto an Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If it makes sense for the target part, the user can drop something onto a part
icon (a closed part), just as is done with closed folders on the WorkPlace
Shell. It is up to part developers to support this functionality. The dragged
parts or data are placed inside the part at some default location determined by
the part (usually at the end of its contents). If the intended target part
cannot contain the source part being dragged onto it, the target part will not
allow the drop and the source part will remain where it was before the drag was
attempted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.9. Moving Frames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move frames the user should:

   1. Select the frame.
   2. Position the pointer on the background of the frame; then press and hold
      down MB2.
   3. Move the pointer to a new location, dragging the frame.
   4. Release the mouse button.

 Or:

   1. Select a frame so that its selection border is visible.
   2. Position the pointer over the selection border (but not over a resize
      handle).
   3. Press and hold down MB1 or MB2.
   4. Move the pointer to a new location.
   5. Release the mouse button.

 Or:

   1. Position the pointer anywhere inside a bundled frame.
   2. Press and hold down MB2.
   3. Move the pointer to a new location, dragging the frame.
   4. Release the mouse button.

 Or:

   1. Select a frame.
   2. Select Cut from the Edit or pop-up menu.
   3. Click in a target part.
   4. Select Paste from the Edit or pop-up menu.

 Dragging will probably be the preferred method, since it involves only the
 mouse.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.10. Feedback for Moving Frames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To help users understand how they can manipulate frames, OpenDoc containers
should provide visual feedback. For example, when the user starts to drag the
frame, the frame should change to a dotted outline. This reduces the
possibility that the frame would obscure any underlying content as the user
repositions the frame. This moving frame feedback is identical for any frame
regardless of its current selection or activation state.

The dragged outline will retain its original size and shape while it is being
dragged. When a frame is dropped it will take on the preferred content
representation of its current container.  For example, if a frame is dropped
onto the Desktop, it will turn into a icon (the Desktop's preferred
representation for its contents).

Pointer over border

Frame border drag representation
The frame's border is represented as a dotted line while it is
being dragged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.11. Moving a Template Part ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Templates behave differently from other objects. When you drag a template, the
default action is Create Another (a new object is torn off). To move a template
by direct manipulation, the user must press Shift+drag (which is the explicit
move combination). See Template for more information.

To move a template part using menu operations, the user should do the
following:

Note:  These are the same operations used to move any part by using menus.

   1. Select a template.
   2. Select Cut or Copy from the Edit or or pop-up menu.
   3. Select a target.
   4. Select Paste as from the Edit or pop-up menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.12. Using the Paste As Choice ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Paste as choice is used for:

     Controlling data embedding during Move and Copy operations.
     Controlling part representations during Move and Copy operations; for
      example, icon or frame.
     Creating links.

  The Paste As Dialog Box

 The contents of the clipboard are pasted at the specified location according
 to these options. The meanings of the options follow:

 Paste with Link
           A checkbox. If the user chooses Paste with Link, a link is created
           between the source and target. See Drafts, Linking, and Scripting
           for more information about Paste with Link.

 Get Updates
           Contains two radio buttons (Automatically and Manually) specifying
           when changes to the source cause the target to update. Automatically
           means the target will be updated as soon as the change is received.
           Manually means only when the user selects the Update Now choice from
           the Properties notebook of the Link Target page (see Selecting
           Linked Parts or Data for more information about these choices); this
           inhibits the target from displaying changes to the source when it
           receives them, effectively disabling the link. The default is
           Automatically.

 Description
           Allows the user to identify the link with a description of it.

 At the target of a link, the user can make the following choices:

 Merge with Contents
           A radio button paired with Embed as. These choices allow the user to
           control the embedding of data in new parts.

           Normally, during Move and Copy operations, data is automatically
           embedded in a new part if it is of a different kind than the target
           part. The Paste as dialog gives the user manual control over this
           embedding. It is also the primary means for creating links.

           Merge with Contents interacts with the Kind option in the following
           way.

           If a Kind is specified that the target part cannot handle, Merge
           with Contents is marked as unavailable and Embed as becomes
           selected. On the other hand, if the selected Kind can be handled by
           the target, the user can choose Merge with Contents and select a
           Kind from a drop-down list of kinds the target part can handle. Thus
           the user can never ask a target part to accept a kind of data that
           it does not support.

 Embed as (Frame, Large Icon, Small Icon, Thumbnail)
           Ordinarily if the source and target kinds are compatible the source
           part would be merged with the target. However, the user might want
           to maintain the pasted selection as a separate part so that it can
           be manipulated separately from its container.  In this case, the
           user would choose Embed as. For example, the user might wish to
           embed a text sidebar in a text page. The Embed as option forces the
           source to be embedded in the target as a separate part. When Embed
           as is selected, the entire list of Kinds appears.

           If the target document is restricted to allow only certain kinds of
           parts to be embedded in it, the Embed as option might not be valid.
           In this case, it is marked as unavailable. The drop-down list allows
           the user to specify the representation of the part that will be
           embedded, that is, a frame, a large icon, a small icon, or a
           thumbnail. Also note that links can be embedded or merged with the
           data as well.

 Kind
           The format in which the pasted data will appear. The available kinds
           are presented as a drop-down list of choices. These choices allow
           the user to control the format of pasted data. Normally if data has
           to be converted to a different format during a Move, Copy, or Link
           operation, the active part will choose will choose a default format
           according to the rules described in Editors and Viewers and Part
           Kinds and Categories. But the user can override this default and
           specify a data format explicitly through the Kind option. Some
           examples of Kinds follow:

                      ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                      Γöé AcmeSoft Text 8.0     Γöé AcmeSoft Text 9.0     Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé BetaWare Write 2.0     Γöé BetaWare Write 3.1     Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé Surf Animation 1.2     Γöé PICT            Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé PICT2           Γöé TIFF            Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé RTF            Γöé ASCII Text         Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé Unicode Text        Γöé PostScript         Γöé
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

 Editor
           A read-only field displaying the part editor name.

 Paste
           A push button to select the paste operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.7. Drag-and-Drop Data Transfer Techniques ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Users can copy and move items within OpenDoc without using menus by dragging
the items with the mouse pointer. Dragging is performed with the manipulation
button (the default in OS/2 is MB2).

OpenDoc follows the drag defaults specified by the Object-Oriented Interface
Design-IBM Common User Access Guidelines. Unmodified dragging in certain
contexts implies Move, while unmodified dragging in other contexts implies
Copy. The terms Copy-drag and Move-drag are used to clarify that they are the
drag-and-drop versions of the Copy and Move operations.

When an OpenDoc document from the Desktop is Copy-dragged into another
document, it will create a new part with the same name and content as the one
on the Desktop. Likewise, Copy-dragging a part to the Desktop will create a new
document with the part's name. If the document name already exists in the same
container, the current rules for name clashes of WorkPlace Shell objects will
be followed.  The name will be appended with : and a number starting with 1.

When a user of OpenDoc drags an item within a document, the item is moved. When
the user drags an item across document boundaries, the item is also moved
unless the drag is between fixed media and removable media (for example, a
diskette)(**), in which case it is copied.

Occasionally, the user might wish to override the system defaults and force a
Copy or Move operation, so mechanisms for doing so are provided. The Ctrl key
is used to force a Copy operation, while the Shift key is used to force a Move
operation.

The following user actions illustrate the default and forced operations.

To accept default behavior:

   1. Position the mouse pointer on the source part.
   2. Press and hold down MB2.
   3. Move the pointer to a new location.
   4. Release the mouse button.

 To force a copy:

   1. Position the pointer on the source part.
   2. Press and hold down the Ctrl key.
   3. Press and hold down MB2.
   4. Move the pointer, dragging the source, to a new location.
   5. Release the mouse button.
   6. Release the Ctrl key.

      The system makes a copy of the dragged item and places the copy at the
      pointer location. The Ctrl key may be pressed anytime. The state of the
      Ctrl key at the end of a drag-before the mouse button is released is
      significant. A Drag-move can be turned into a Drag-copy at any time prior
      to releasing the mouse button by pressing the Ctrl key.

 To force a move:

   1. Position the pointer on the source part.
   2. Press and hold down the Shift key.
   3. Press and hold down MB2.
   4. Move the pointer to a new location.
   5. Release the mouse button.
   6. Release the Shift key.

 Regardless of whether the user is performing a drag-move or drag-copy, an
 outline of the source is dragged to the new location; it follows the pointer
 as the mouse moves. When the mouse button is released, the item is placed
 (dropped) at the pointer location or at the nearest default drop point.
 Whatever part the pointer is over receives a drop event notifying it that
 something has been dropped on it. Each receiving part should follow the Embed
 versus Incorporate rules discussed in Cut, Copy, Paste, and Create.

 Using drag-and-drop can be easier than using menus, but it requires that parts
 provide additional user feedback. The next three figures show dragging some
 content between documents of the same kind.

  Selected text to be copied between documents of the same
  kind

 The first three words of the document Chestnut have been selected and are
 about to be copy-dragged. The next figure shows the drag feedback that is the
 outline of the selection, which shows that this selection is being dragged
 into the document My Doc.

  Text content from Chestnut is being dragged to My Doc
  Note that drag-and-drop does not allow content to be dropped
  into a part if that content is not of one of the types on the Inclusions List
  for that part.

 To indicate the target of a drop, normal WorkPlace Shell target emphasis will
 be used. In the case of the root-part (or document), the target emphasis
 appears just inside the window border (the same happens when you drag over an
 open WorkPlace Shell folder), Because this window shows target emphasis, the
 user knows which part the content is being dragged into. If the part cannot
 accept the drop, the cursor should change to the OS/2 do not drop indicator.

  A copy of the text is incorporated into the target

 A copy of the text is incorporated into the target. shows that a copy of the
 three words dragged from Chestnut have now been dropped into My Doc. The
 target part now behaves exactly as though Copy and Paste operations had been
 used instead of drag-and-drop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.7.1. Accelerators ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An accelerator is a mnemonic and a key or combination of keys that a user can
press to perform an action that is available from a menu. Developers should
support predefined mnemonics and accelerator key assignments for each
predefined choice in a menu. Developers should also provide a unique shortcut
key assignment for each frequently-used choice in a menu. See the
Object-Oriented Interface Design-IBM Common User Access Guidelines for more
information about mnemonics and accelerator keys.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.7.2. Management of Contained Part Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When a contained part is dragged to another location, the result is a copy or
move of the underlying part and of its representation (small icon, large icon,
thumbnail, or frame) in the new location. Any windows currently open on the
target container part will update to show the new content.

When a drag is a regular move within a document, the window of the moved part
remains open. However, if the result of the drag is a move outside of a
document, any windows that were open, close when the icon is dropped onto its
new location, and the information that was in the window is preserved in its
current state in the new location.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8. Creating New Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are several ways to make a new part. These methods can be broken down
into two categories, explicit and implicit creation. Parts are explicitly
created by tearing off a new object from a template, copying a single part
somewhere, or using the Create menu choice. Parts are implicitly created as a
side-effect of pasting some content from another part. For example, copying
content in one part and pasting it into another part of a different kind
creates a new embedded part. These are described in detail in Cut, Copy, Paste,
and Create and in Template.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8.1. Deleting a Part ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Users can delete parts by using one of the following methods:

   1. Drag a part (icon or frame) to the Shredder icon.

      The part is removed and deleted.

 Or:

   1. Select a part (icon or frame).
   2. Choose Delete selection from the Edit or pop-up menu. The selected part
      is deleted. The clipboard is not involved.

 Or:

   1. Select a part (icon or frame).
   2. Press the Del key. The selected part is deleted. The clipboard is not
      involved.

 Users can cause parts to be deleted as a side effect of other user actions.
 Users should be warned before these implicit, or accidental, deletions take
 effect. The implicit sequences are:

   1. Select a part frame.
   2. Choose Cut from the Edit or pop-up menu.
   3. Overwrite the clipboard contents by copying or cutting again.

      The selected part is removed from its container and placed on the
      clipboard. If the user does not Paste before selecting another Cut or
      Copy, the previous Cut selection is deleted.

 Or:

   1. Move a part (icon or frame) into another part's window, where the target
      part is in a different document (and the document does not have Perfect
      Save).
   2. Close the target document without saving it.

      This has the effect of deleting the moved part, although the user may not
      be aware of it. A message is displayed asking if the user wants to save
      the changes. If the answer is no, then the moved part is deleted.

 Or:

   1. Select a part (icon or frame) in a text container.
   2. Type a character. The selected part is deleted and replaced by the typed
      character if the container accepts typing as data input. This operation
      should be reversible.

 Parts that auto-save or perfect-save such as folders do not need to be
 explictly saved when their windows are closed, since closing them does not
 delete anything. In fact, such parts do not even have a Save choice. Only
 windows for parts that do not auto-save can cause content to be lost; which
 includes most document windows.

 The user can delete multiple parts at once by making a multiple selection
 before doing one of the above actions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8.2. Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Undo {action} is designed to allow recovery from errors that the user
recognizes soon after they are made.  The Undo choice is displayed as:

Undo {action that can be undone}

Part developers should supply wording that describes all undoable actions. The
words are appended to the Undo choice to indicate to the user what will happen
when they choose Undo. For example:

Undo typing

In most of today's applications, only one level of Undo is usually supported.
Single-level Undo allows the user to correct only the most recent undoable
action taken. For example, if the user pastes to a target that was not the
intended target and then types a word, the typing is the only action that can
be undone. This limitation renders the Undo ineffective.

For this reason, OpenDoc supports multiple levels of Undo and Redo. This change
allows users to recover from more errors than is possible today. For example,
if the user invokes Undo three times in succession, the last three undoable
actions are undone in reverse order. There is no inherent limit in the number
of times that Undo can be invoked in succession. However some user actions
clear out the Undo history, resetting it to zero. A typical example is a user
selecting Save from the Document menu; Undo cannot unsave it, or undo any
actions taken prior to the Save action. Developers determine what actions reset
the Undo history for each part.

To use Undo the user chooses Undo from the Edit menu.

The following scenarios illustrate how Undo behaves when the user uses
drag-and-drop:

Scenario 1:

   1. User selects text in document 1 and Copy-drags it to open document 2.
      (Copy-drag refers to the force Copy operations described in Drag-and-Drop
      Data Transfer Techniques).
   2. User selects the Undo choice. The inserted text in document 2 is removed.
      The text in document 1 is left undisturbed because it was merely copied.

 Scenario 2:

   1. User selects text in document 1 and drags it (a default move) to an open
      window on document 2.
   2. User selects the Undo choice. The inserted text in document 2 is removed
      and the text reappears in document 1.

 Note:  Closing any window resets the system's Undo history.

 The effects of the last undoable user action are reversed, restoring all parts
 to their states before that action. Not all user actions are reversible. For
 example, scrolling, making selections, and opening and closing windows are not
 reversable, because they do not change the contents of a part. In general,
 developers decide what the undoable actions are.

 Some actions in OpenDoc might affect two or more parts. For example,
 move-dragging something from one part to another changes both parts.

 Note:  If both parts are within the same document, then Undo is supported
        across the parts. However, for this release of OpenDoc, Undo is not
        supported across documents. Thus errors that are made between two
        different documents or between a document and the WorkPlace Shell are
        not undoable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8.3. Redo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Redo is a choice on the Edit menu that reverses the last Undo action that has
not been redone. It is available only if the last reversible user action was to
invoke Undo or Redo. Redo restores all parts to their states before the Undo
action was invoked. The Redo choice is displayed as:

Redo {action that can be undone}

Part developers should supply wording that describes all undoable actions. The
words are appended to the Redo choice to indicate to the user what will happen
when they choose Redo. For example:

Redo typing

Note:  The developer should use the same words to describe the Redo action as
       were used in the Undo action.

 The following table illustrates an extended Undo - Redo sequence:

  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
  Γöé Table 2. Extended Undo - Redo                  Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé USER TRIES TO DO        Γöé SYSTEM ACTION          Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé action A            Γöé does A's effects        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé action B            Γöé does B's effects        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé action C            Γöé does C's effects        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Undo              Γöé reverses C's effects      Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Redo              Γöé does C's effects        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Undo              Γöé reverses C's effects      Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Undo              Γöé reverses B's effects      Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Redo              Γöé does B's effects        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé action D            Γöé does D's effects        Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Redo              Γöé invalid, can not be chosen   Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Undo              Γöé reverses D's effects      Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Undo              Γöé reverses B's effects      Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Save              Γöé writes the changes to disk   Γöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé Undo              Γöé invalid, can not be chosen   Γöé
  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

 OpenDoc supports multiple levels of Redo. Every time the user selects Redo,
 the next Undo action, if any, is reversed. Repeated Redo works only if the
 user selected Undo multiple times in succession. For example, suppose the user
 selects Undo three times in a row. The user can then select Redo up to three
 times in a row to restore those actions, but he cannot select Redo four times
 since there were not that many Undo actions.

 If the user performs a new action other than an Undo or Redo, then Redo can no
 longer be performed because the Redo history is cleared.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Sources for Parts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section describes how users access new and existing parts. In addition,
Installing and Removing Editors discusses the ways in which editors are
installed onto a user's system.

Two ways in which users can create new parts were previously described:

     Copy a part

      The user copies an existing part. A new part is created of the same type
      as the original, containing a copy of all its contents.
     Create a part

      The user selects Create... from the object or pop-up menu. A new part is
      created of the same type as the original, but without the original's
      contents.

 Another source for parts is:

     Templates

      The simplest and most frequently used method for creating a part is to
      drag off a part from a template. The new part is of the same type as the
      template and may contain a specified subset of the template's contents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1. Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Conceptually, a template is modeled after a pad of paper in the physical world.
When you want a new sheet of paper, you tear it off the pad. Templates can also
contain data (or other parts). Users can also use templates to create
preconfigured objects.  For example, a business-letter part newly dragged off a
template may already have the sender's address filled in, as well as the
current date. It could also have the margins and other text-formatting options
set as appropriate for such a document. Developers can use templates to provide
useful items such as business letters with preset areas for the header,
address, greeting and body of the letter.

In OpenDoc, a template is a part that has the Template property set. This
setting changes the drag behavior so that an unaugmented (default) drag from a
template causes the creation of a new part.

The new part is not a template because its Template property is off. The new
part is an ordinary part of the same type as the template. The new part
contains a copy of all of the contents of the template. (**)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1.1. Creating a Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To convert a part into a template:

   1. Choose Properties from a pulldown or pop-up menu.
   2. Choose the General tab.
   3. Click in the check box labeled Template.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1.2. Creating a New Part from a Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create an object from a template the user should do the following:

   1. Open the OpenDoc Templates folder.
   2. Position the pointer on a template icon.
   3. Press and hold MB2.
   4. Drag the pointer (with the newly created part icon attached) to a new
      target.
   5. Release MB2.

 For example, the user drags a new object from a template in a folder window to
 a document window. This would cause the new object to appear as a frame. The
 template part remains an icon in the folder. It is not changed. See The copy
 appears as a frame..


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1.3. Moving a Template Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move a template the user should do the following:

   1. Position the pointer on a template icon.
   2. Press and hold the Shift key.
   3. Press and hold MB2.
   4. Drag the template icon to the new target.
   5. Release MB2 and then the Shift key.

 Note:  This is the same as a forced move for any object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1.4. Copying a Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy a template the user should do the following:

   1. Point at a template icon.
   2. Press and hold the Ctrl key.
   3. Press and hold MB2.
   4. Drag the template icon to the new target.
   5. Release MB2 and then the Ctrl key.

 Note:  This is the same as a forced copy for any object.

 The new copy is exactly like the original; it is also a template.

  The icon is dragged into an open window
  A new part is placed in the Trip Report window.

  The copy appears as a frame


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2. Installing and Removing Editors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section describes what happens when part's editors and viewers are
installed or removed from an OpenDoc system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.1. Installing an Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Users will install new editors for one of two reasons.

First, a user might have acquired a new kind of part for which no editor exists
currently on his system. In this situation, it is safe to assume that the user
wishes to use the new editor for its kind of part. Thus, the system wide editor
preferences are set accordingly. In this case, installation of the editor
should be transparent to the user.

The other reason a user might install a new editor is to update an older
version of an editor already in the system or have access to an additional
editor. In this situation it is not safe to make the updated editor the
preferred editor for this kind, because doing so would cause any existing parts
on the system to now be edited using this new editor.

When subsequent editors for the same kind are installed (another Text editor),
the user is asked if they want the new editor to be installed and if this
editor should become the preferred one.

When the user installs a newer version of an editor it should be installed
without disturbing any existing versions in the system. Because the part's
editor preferences still refer to the original editors, parts in existing
documents continue to use their original editors, until the user explicitly
deletes the editors(**).

If users wish to substitute editors on a part, they may modify the part's
editor preference. System wide preferences may be changed in the Editor
Preferences object as described in Editor Properties. In addition, when a part
is opened, but its preferred editor has been removed, the user will be asked to
specify another editor preference.

OS/2 is currently working on a design to install applications and system
function through drag-and-drop. This method will provide developers with a set
of tools to create a draggable package to install objects.

The following defaults are recommended for installation:

     All part-editor files should be installed in a directory off of the
      OS2\OpenDoc directory.
     Templates should be placed in the OpenDoc Templates folder. If a Part
      Editor provides several part templates (more than 3) then a folder should
      be created in the OpenDoc Templates folder in order to hold the parts.
      Users should be able to subsequenly move the templates wherever they
      prefer to keep them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.2. Editors and Categories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When an editor is installed OpenDoc checks the category information and
determines whether an editor of that category has already been installed on the
system. If not, the new editor becomes the preferred editor for all parts of
that category, For example, if an editor for the 2D Graphics category of parts
was never installed, installing a Draw editor results in setting that editor as
the preferred editor for the 2D Graphics category.

Note:  If the user has only a viewer installed for a category and then installs
       an editor, the editor becomes the preferred one for that category.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.3. Replacing Part Editors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following are situations when a user might want to replace a part editor:

     A user no longer wishes to use a viewer or editor for a particular part
      type. For example, rather than using AcmeWrite Text for text, the user
      now wishes to use BetaWare Write. See Choosing an Editor in Editor
      Properties.
     The user might prefer to use a different editor for handling a specific
      part. The particular viewer or editor associated with a part is
      controlled at the part level. The user can select a part and specify a
      different editor by modifying the part properties.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Drafts, Linking, and Scripting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section describes the advantages of the drafts and draft-history, linking,
and scripting facilities in OpenDoc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1. Drafts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A draft is a particular version of a document. A series of drafts can serve as
a change history for a document, recording the revisions that it goes through
and thereby creating an editing history of the document.

Users can create a new draft at any time to take a snapshot of the current
state of the document. Drafts are not created automatically, such as during
Save operations. They are created explicitly by users. Drafts are stored
efficiently, as differences from the previous draft, so there is little cost
for using them.

Drafts are represented as objects in the draft history of the document. Drafts
have many of the same behaviors as other objects. A user can read, delete, or
copy a draft into a new document. However, users cannot edit drafts in the
draft history.  The user may use an earlier draft as the basis of a new
document by first copying a draft, then editing the copied version of the
draft.

Users may examine old drafts at any time. Perhaps they want to see how a
document has changed recently. Or they may decide that earlier drafts are
incorrect or no longer needed so they want to delete them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1.1. Draft History ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The set of drafts associated with a document is called the draft history. The
information stored in the history includes when changes were made, by whom, and
comments about the changes. The draft history does not include the current
document because it has not yet been saved as an actual draft. To revert to a
previous draft the user must either move or copy the draft somewhere else (to
the Desktop for example).

A user can access the draft history of a document by selecting Draft history
from the Drafts cascaded menu (on the Document menu). A new window is opened
into a Details view. All the normal folder operations are available except that
the Draft History view cannot serve as the target of any Copy, Move, or Link
operations.
Menus

The following menu items appear on the Draft History menu bar:

 History

 Print draft history...
           Leads to a dialog allowing the user to print a list of the Draft
           History contents.

 Edit

 Delete
           Deletes the selected draft.

 Select all
           Selects all the drafts in the view.

 Deselect all
           Deselects all the drafts in the view.

 Open selection
           Opens the selected draft(s) into a read-only view.

 Selection properties
           Opens a window showing the properties of a selected draft.

 Print selection...
           Leads to a dialog allowing the user to print the content of a
           selected draft.

 View

 Icons
           Shows icons view in the current window.

 Details
           Shows details view in the current window (details view is the
           default view when Draft History is opened).

 Help

 General Help
           Help on Draft History.

 Using Help
           How to use Help Manager.

  Drafts View

 Drafts are shown as individual document icons, much like files in a folder.
 Each draft has the following pieces of information associated with it:

 Draft name
           The name for the draft. This name will be used as the object name if
           it is copied to the Desktop.

 Creator
           The user who created the draft. For the first draft, this is the
           user who created the document.

 Created
           The date and time the draft was created. This information is
           separated into two columns.

 Comment
           A field the user can set containing explanatory information for
           other users. The comment is optional and is for the user's
           information.

 OpenDoc creates most of this information automatically; users supply the
 comments and the creator name. The window title of the draft history window is
 of the form {Document name} - Drafts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1.2. Creating a Draft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a draft the user should do the following:

   1. From the Document window, select Document => Drafts => Create Draft.

 A dialog appears requesting additional information:

  Dialog for creating a new draft

 The draft name will default to the (Document name)-Draft (1). The draft number
 is the next higher unused integer. The last name used will be the default for
 Creator; however, if the user has a logon name then that should be used as the
 default creator name. The user can choose to modify the Creator field, and can
 also enter a comment to distinguish the new draft from older ones.

 When the user clicks on Create in the Create Draft dialog, the current
 document is saved as a new draft. This action saves the document and the user
 does not have to explicitly save the document before creating a draft. The
 information about the new draft is added to the top of the draft history.

 The new draft becomes locked; it is no longer the current draft and it can no
 longer be modified.

 If the user clicks the Cancel button, the Create Draft dialog box is
 dismissed, no new draft is created, and the focus returns to the current
 document's window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1.3. Editing a Draft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A user can edit only the current document. All other drafts are read-only.
Users can select intrinsic contents or parts in the other open drafts but not
modify them. Any attempt to modify a draft is rejected with a message. The
menus displayed when a draft window is open and active should match those of a
viewer displaying a document. For example, functions that cause modifications
in the open draft are disabled; however, Copy and Save a Copy are available.

Users cannot edit the Creator name, Comment, or contents of drafts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1.4. Deleting a Draft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a draft the user should do the following:

   1. Select a draft in the Draft History window
   2. Choose Delete from an Edit menu, pop-up menu, or by pressing the Del key.

 Or:

   1. Drag a draft from the draft history window to the shredder.

 When one of the these user actions is taken, the standard WorkPlace Shell
 confirmation is displayed.

 If the user proceeds, the draft is deleted from the document's draft history
 and the draft can no longer be accessed.

 If the user deletes the most recent draft, and then creates a new draft, it
 will have the same number as the previously deleted draft. However, if the
 user deletes an older draft, its number is not reused.

 Note:  Deleting a draft may not reclaim all the disk space occupied by the
        draft, since a document is stored as a series of deltas from previous
        drafts and these deltas are passed along to the next draft when a draft
        is deleted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2. Linking Documents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The concept of a linked document is similar to the concept of a database and
shadows of that database.  Whether a user links a paragraph of text or some
type of chart or graphic to another document (or documents/parts), whenever the
user updates the original source, the linked target can also be updated.

Linking will be widely used in OpenDoc's compound documents, more so than in
today's applications, for two reasons. First, linking is essential to the
concept of generic parts; that is, parts that perform services for other parts.
For example, by linking parts users can employ a bar-chart part to display data
from a table part or a spreadsheet part. Developers do not have to build a
charting capability into each of these parts. Linking enables parts to leverage
each other. Second, OpenDoc's user interface to linking is simpler than
previous linking interfaces.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.1. Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A link is a relationship between a source item and a copy of the source item.
Unlike an ordinary copy that is a one-time snapshot, a linked copy is updated
every time the original item changes. Both part contents and entire parts can
be linked. Links can exist within a single part, between two parts in a single
document, or between two parts in different documents. For instance, a document
might link a picture from another document, or a bar chart might display data
that is linked from a spreadsheet.

Links are one way; every link has a single source and a single target:

A Link from A to B

A given source item can be linked many times to different targets, but each
connection would be a separate, independent link:

Multiple Links from the Same Source

When a source item changes, all of its links are updated, however, the target
of a link cannot be edited.

The source of a link can be any content; for example, a single letter, a
sentence fragment, multiple paragraphs, cells in a spreadsheet, a circle in a
drawing, a table, or all the contents of a part. The source of a link can also
include embedded content. The target can be in the same document as the source
(intra-document linking) or in a different document (inter-document linking).

If a source item has multiple links from it, each target can display the data
differently. A target may display the data in the same format as the source;
for example, a financial report might display a few spreadsheet cells linked in
from a larger master spreadsheet. Or a target might transform the data by one
of its algorithms. For example, a charting program might graph data from the
same cells as a bar chart.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.2. Creating a Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a link using menus the user should do the following:

   1. Select a source.
   2. Choose Copy from the Edit or pop-up menu.
   3. Click in a target part.
   4. Choose Paste As... from the Edit or a pop-up menu.
   5. Check the Paste with Link option if not checked or grayed.
   6. Click on the Paste push button.

 Notice that creating a link using the menus method is similar to making a
 simple copy.

 There is an equivalent drag-and-drop method for making a link. The user makes
 a selection in the source document and drags it to the target with the Shift
 and Ctrl keys pressed down. When the user releases the mouse button, the link
 will be created.

 To use the drag and drop method, the user should do the following:

   1. Hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys.
   2. Press and hold MB2.
   3. Drag the selection into a target part.
   4. Release MB2.
   5. Release the Shift and Ctrl keys.

 Using Paste As

 The Paste as menu choice is used for:

   1. Creating links.
   2. Controlling data embedding during Move, Copy, or Link operations.
   3. Controlling how embedded parts appear after Move, Copy, or Link
      operations, for example, icon or frame.

 This choice is described in Cut, Copy, Paste, and Create.

  The Paste As Dialog Box

 The meanings of the options follow:

 Paste with Link
           A checkbox. If the user chooses Paste with Link, a link is created
           between the source and target. See Drafts, Linking, and Scripting
           for more information about Paste with Link.

 Get Updates
           Contains two radio buttons (Automatically and Manually) specifying
           when changes to the source cause the target to update. Automatically
           means the target will be updated as soon as the change is received.
           Manually means the target will be updated only when the user selects
           the Update Now choice from the Properties notebook of the Link
           Target page (see Selecting Linked Parts or Data for more information
           about these choices); this choice inhibits the target from
           displaying changes to the source when it receives them, effectively
           disabling the link. The default is Automatically.

 Description
           Allows the user to identify the link with a description of it.

 At the target of a link, the user can make the following choices:

 Merge with Contents
           A radio button paired with Embed as. These choices allow the user to
           control the way data is pasted in new parts.

           Normally, during Move and Copy operations, data is automatically
           embedded in a new part if it is of a different kind than the target
           part. The Merge with Contents choice allows the user to overwrite
           this default behavior. It is also the primary means for creating
           links.

           Merge with Contents interacts with the Kind option in the following
           way.

           If a Kind is specified that the target part cannot handle, Merge
           with Contents is marked as unavailable and Embed as becomes
           selected. On the other hand, if the selected Kind can be handled by
           the target, the user can choose Merge with Contents and select a
           Kind from a drop-down list of kinds the target part can handle.

 Embed as (Frame, Large Icon, Small Icon, Thumbnail)
           Ordinarily if the source and target kinds are compatible the source
           part would be merged with the target. However, the user might want
           to maintain the pasted selection as a separate part so that it can
           be manipulated separately from its container.  In this case, the
           user would choose Embed as. For example, the user might wish to
           embed a text sidebar in a text page. The Embed as option forces the
           source to be embedded in the target as a separate part.

           When Embed as is selected, the entire list of Kinds appears. Thus
           the user can never ask a target part to accept a kind of data that
           it does not support.

           If the target document is restricted to allow only certain kinds of
           parts to be embedded in it, the Embed as option might not be valid.
           In this case, it is marked as unavailable. The drop-down list allows
           the user to specify the representations of the part that will be
           embedded, that is, a frame, a large icon, a small icon, or a
           thumbnail. Also note that links can be embedded or merged with the
           data as well.

 Kind
           The format in which the pasted data will appear. The available kinds
           are presented as a drop-down list of choices. These choices allow
           the user to control the format of pasted data. Normally if data has
           to be converted to a different format during a Move, Copy, or Link
           operation, the active part will choose will choose a default format
           according to the rules described in Editors and Viewers and Part
           Kinds and Categories. But the user can override this default and
           specify a data format explicitly through the Kind option. Some
           examples of Kinds follow:

                      ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
                      Γöé AcmeSoft Text 8.0     Γöé AcmeSoft Text 9.0     Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé Beta Ware Write 2.0    Γöé Beta Ware Write 3.1    Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé Surf Animation 1.2     Γöé PICT            Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé PICT2           Γöé TIFF            Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé RTF            Γöé ASCII Text         Γöé
                      Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
                      Γöé Unicode Text        Γöé PostScript         Γöé
                      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

 Editor
           A read-only field displaying the part editor name.

 Paste
           A push button to select the paste operation.
 After a link is pasted, its emphasis will remain in place until the user

   selects the Hide links menu choice.

 Link emphasis also appears when the user interacts with a linked part; for
 example, when a user sets an insertion point within a link source or selects
 some content of a link. In these cases, the link emphasis is shown in addition
 to the active highlighting of the part's frame. Link emphasis that occurs as a
 side effect of interaction is removed from the part when the user clicks
 outside of the linked part.

 When an inactive, unselected link is highlighted with the Show links option, a
 dotted box is drawn around the frame; otherwise, an active or selected border
 is used. An outward-pointing arrow is added to the right side of the frame for
 a source link. For a target link, an inward-pointing arrow is added to the
 left side of the frame.

 All editing choices are available and operate as before for parts that are
 sources of links; link targets cannot be edited directly. Note that the Show
 Links and Hide Links function have no effect on the user's ability to edit
 links.

 The link graphic indicating a link should be added to the active or selected
 border or to the dotted line that indicates the link boundaries at the bottom
 of the first quarter of the part's height, starting from the top. This
 position minimizes the risk of conflict with resize handles. The next few
 figures show examples (also see Appendix A for a detailed view of the link
 graphic).

  Link Feedback on Frames

  Link Feedback on Icons
  The boxes
  around the icons represent the edges of the icons' bitmaps and the
  boundaries of the emphasis region. These boxes do not appear on the
  user's screen. For more details see pixel-wise views in Appendix B.

 This link highlighting overlays (and may obscure) any surrounding content. It
 does not cause the surrounding content to reformat itself.

  Active Irregular Shaped Part with Link Feedback
  Instead of repeating the pictures for both target
  and source links, the source
  link is shown in its entirety along with a portion of a target link
  border.

  Selected Irregular Shaped Part with Link Feedback

 If a window that includes linked parts is closed and later reopened, the link
 highlighting remains in its previous state. Note that when Show Links is set,
 all(**) sources and targets in the active part are highlighted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.3. Showing the Source of the Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Link emphasis does not indicate which target is linked to which source. OpenDoc
allows target links to be tracked back to the source link, but not vice versa.

From the target of a link the user can ask the system to show the source of
that link.

To show the source of a link the user should do the following:

   1. Activate the target link's container.
   2. Choose Show links from the View menu.
   3. Double-click on the arrow in the highlighting of the target of a link.

 Or:

   1. Select a target link.
   2. Choose Open original from the pop-up menu.

 Or:

   1. Double-click on an icon of a target link.

 Or:

   1. For a target link shown as a frame, double-click the background.

 If the source of the link is the same document as the target, the system
 scrolls the window to the source of the link and selects it(**). If the source
 is in a different document, the system opens the document, scrolls to the
 source of the link, and selects it. The source link border will become
 visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.4. Hide Links ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To hide links the user should do the following:

   1. Activate the container of the links.
   2. Choose Hide links from a View or pop-up menu.

 Or:

   1. Click outside the link.

 Note:  The second method works only if the border was shown as a side-effect
        of insertion or selection within a link.

 When the user hides a link by either method, the link highlighting disappears.
 There is no visible indication that an item is linked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.5. Selecting Linked Parts or Data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select a link the user should do the following:

   1. Choose Show links from the View menu.
   2. Click on the border of the link highlighting.

 Linked parts and data can be selected just as any other parts or data. Note
 that links may be nested. That is, a source link might completely contain a
 source or target link, or source links might overlap. In this case, the
 ultimate target link does not show the nested links, because only the content,
 not the links themselves, is propagated through the link.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.6. Showing Link Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To show link properties the user should do the following:

   1. Select the part that contains the link.
   2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

 The Properties pages in the following figures are added to the Properties
 notebook of the part that contains the link. Additional properties pages can
 be added. For example, at a target link you might want to allow local
 properties for Fonts that override the settings in the source part.

  Link Source Properties Notebook page

 The properties for the Link Source are:

 Select a Link
           Allows the user to choose a link source. As the link sources change,
           the data presented in Link Source, Connected Links, and Send
           Updates, are updated.

 Kind
           Shows the part kind used for the link source. This field is
           scrollable and read-only.

 Created
           Shows the date and time the link source was created. This field is
           scrollable and read-only.

 Edited
           A read-only field showing the date and time the link was last
           edited.

 Show Link Source
           This push button allows the user to see where the link source is
           within a document.  It is up to the part developer to determine the
           type of visual to use to indicate a link source. This push button is
           grayed if the document resides on a different machine.

 Break All Links
           If the user selects this push button, a confirmation dialog box is
           displayed. If the user confirms this choice, the link source is
           grayed in the Select a Link field until the user exits the notebook,
           and then the link is broken.

 Edit Description
           Allows the user to edit the current selected description.

 Connected Links
           This section provides information about the link targets
           corresponding to the selected link source.

 Connection Data
           Displays the hostname and the document name of a link.

 Get Remote Data
           This push button is used to get the data about the remote link
           source. It is grayed if the link source is local.

 Break Link
           This push button causes a dialog box to be displayed. If the user
           confirms this action, the link is grayed in the Connected Links
           field until the user exits the notebook. Once the notebook is
           closed, the link between the selected link source and the selected
           link is broken.

 Send Updates
           A two-valued radio button (Automatically, Manually) which specifies
           when to propagate changes. Automatically means changes to the source
           will be propogated to the target whenever the user, or the system,
           saves the source part. If Automatically is selected and the user
           closes a document without saving it, its links are not updated.
           Manually means changes are propogated only when the user clicks the
           Send Updates push button; this inhibits the source from affecting
           anything unless the user explicitly directs it to do so, effectively
           disabling the link. The default is On Save.

           The Send Updates setting is available only for links between
           documents. Links within the same document are always updated
           immediately.

  Link Target Properties Notebook page

 The properties for the Link Target are:

 Links
           This field shows a list of links in the part.  As the data is
           changed, it is updated in Link, Connected Link Source, and Get
           Updates.

 Kind
           Shows the user the part kind used for the link. This field is
           scrollable and read-only.

 Created
           Shows the user the date and time the link was created. This field is
           scrollable and read-only.

 Updated
           A read-only field showing the date and time the link was last
           updated.

 Show Link
           Shows the user where the link is in the part. It is up to the part
           developer to determine the type of visual to use to display the
           link.

 Break Link
           This push button allows the user to break the selected link. If the
           user confirms the Break Link selection, the link is broken after the
           properties notebook is closed.

 Edit Description
           Allows the user to edit the current selected description.

 Connected Link Source
           This section provides read-only text about the link source
           corresponding to the selected link.

 Get Remote Data
           A push button used to get the data about the remote link source. If
           the link source is local, the push button is grayed.

 Show Link Source
           The push button allows the user to find the link source within a
           document.

 Send Updates
           Radio buttons (Automatically, Manually) specifying when changes
           received from the source cause the target to update. Automatically
           means the target will be updated as soon as the change is received.
           Manually means only when the user selects the Update Now choice;
           this inhibits the target from displaying changes to the source when
           it receives them, effectively disabling the link. The default is
           Automatically.

 Update Now
           A push button choice that causes the target to be updated with the
           latest contents of the source. This choice is grayed when Get
           Updates is set to Automatically.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.7. Editing the Source of a Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Users can edit link sources in exactly the same way as they edit unlinked data,
regardless of whether link highlighting is on or off, with no restrictions
whatsoever. No warning message is posted when the source of a link is edited.

When a link source is modified, it propagates its changes to all of its
targets, as specified by its Link Properties page described previously.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.8. Editing the Target of a Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The target of a link can be deleted, but it cannot be edited. Any attempt to
edit the contents results in a message stating that the end of a link is being
modified and asks if the user wants to see the source of the link for editing.
If the user responds with an affirmation, the source of the link is displayed
and is selected.

While the target of a link cannot be edited, it can be selected so that it can
be copied or its properties changed. For example, if a bar chart is linked in
from somewhere, the user can select one of the bars and change the color. If
the link is updated, changing the content of the chart, the new color is
preserved if possible.(**)  Invalid choices for target operations will be
disabled.

When the target of a link in a text part is active there is no persistent
I-beam cursor. This is to indicate to users that they cannot edit the data. In
addition, if the active part provides an information line, it should inform the
user when a target link has been selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.9. Updating a Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Normally, links update automatically whenever the source changes. It is
recommended that part editors provide Refresh now in the View menu, which would
update all of the links in the active part (see the Object-Oriented Interface
Design IBM Common User Access Guidelines for information on Refresh).

To update a link the user should do the following:

   1. Open the Properties notebook.
   2. Choose Update Now or Send Updates in the Properties notebook.

 This action causes data to be propagated (from the source end) or displayed
 (at the target end) immediately. Note that if both the source and the target
 link have set Send Updates and Get Updates to Manual, the user must select
 Update Now at both the source and target to be assured that the target
 contains the same content as the source.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.10. Enabling or Disabling a Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Normally, the system updates links automatically whenever the sources change.
The following table describes the outcome of actions based on the settings in
the Link Source and Link Target Properties pages.

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
Γöé SOURCE         Γöé TARGET         Γöé ACTION        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé Automatically     Γöé Manually        Γöé Always updated    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé Automatically     Γöé Manually        Γöé Press Update now   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé Manually        Γöé Automatically     Γöé Press Send update   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé Manually        Γöé Manually        Γöé Press both      Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.11. Moving a Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The move link action is the same as any other Move action throughout OpenDoc.

When the user moves a link, OpenDoc attempts to preserve the link. For example,
if a source and target link are moved within the same document, or to a
different document, OpenDoc preserves these links. However, if a single source
or target link is moved to a different document, OpenDoc breaks that link(**).
If the user attempts to do this, a warning message displays explaining that the
link will be broken and a new one must be created if linking is desired.

In addition, some parts might not allow links to be pasted into them.  For
example, if some text that contains a target link is copied to a plain text
part, it is likely that the target link will not be maintained. In this case,
the user would get a message warning them that the link will be broken. If the
user completes the Paste Link operation, only the link content at the time of
the copy will be seen in the target.

Because the contents of parts can be displayed in more than one frame, there
are some interesting situations to consider when copying or moving a link. When
the user cuts content including the source or target of a link, the clipboard
will contain the link content and a paste would attempt to reconnect the link.
At paste time, the target part creates a new part of the same type as the part
containing the original content, puts in the contents, and hooks the target
links back to their sources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.12. Copying a Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the user decides to copy a source link only (without its target), only its
contents are copied to the clipboard. Its link target information is not copied
because target links cannot have multiple sources. Links can be maintained only
within documents. The new location may be in the same part as the original, or
in a different part within the same document. Links are not copied from one
document to another, except as source-target pairs.

Copying the source of a link does not alter the source or its links. They
remain unchanged. The new copy initially has no links from it. The user can
subsequently create links from the new copy, but these are independent of the
old source and its links.

When a user copies a target link, or a source-target pair, the linking
information is copied along with the content.

Copying the target of a link creates a new link to the same source. Unlike the
Create Link operation, however, the Paste As dialog box does not appear, unless
the Paste as choice is selected instead of the Paste choice. The links
properties are set for the old target.  As for a normal Paste operation, if the
new target part cannot handle that data kind, Embed is automatically turned on,
and the data is embedded in a part at the target. If the target does not allow
embedding of that type of part, it does not enable the Paste and Paste as menu
choices and it does not accept a drop.

Single Target

The result is another link to the same source.

Multiple Targets

Not a chained link.

Chained Link, not available in OpenDoc

When only one source is involved, OpenDoc will not have chained dependencies
between targets. However, because target links can be nested within different
source links, it is possible to create dependencies between links similar to
Chained Link, not available in OpenDoc., but involving a distinct source link
at each stage.

Copying both the source and target of a link creates an entirely new link
between the copy of the source and the copy of the target. The new link has no
relationship to the original source or target or any of their links. If Paste
as is selected, the user can create a new link to the same source, just like
copying the target of a link. But Paste as also lets the user control kind,
embedding, and appearance of the new link at the new target. Therefore, this is
the recommended way to create multiple links from a single source. The same
link source might appear quite differently at the different targets. See the
OpenDoc Progamming Guide for more information about multiple links.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.13. Deleting a Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A link can be broken either by explicit user actions intended to break links,
or as a side effect of another user action which links cannot survive.

To break a link the user can do the following:

   1. Open the Properties notebook page of the Link Target.
   2. Choose Break Link.

 Or:

   1. Select a target link.
   2. Choose Break link from the target containers' Edit menu.

 Or:

   1. Select the source or target of a link or both.
   2. Choose Cut from the Edit or pop-up menu, or press the Del key.

 When the user breaks a link, the actual content of the source and target does
 not change. However, subsequent changes to the source are not reflected in the
 target, since each target is now just an ordinary copy.

 If the user deletes the source of a link, the links between it and all its
 targets are deleted. All targets now become disconnected copies with the
 content they had from the last update.

 If the user deletes the target of a link, just the single link between it and
 the source is deleted. The source does not change.

 The user can reverse the deletion of a link by selecting Undo in the Edit
 menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3. Scripting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Scripting allows customization of the interface. It is expected that most users
will experience scripting indirectly, by using documents created from
stationary that was created by third-party developers to provide extra
functionality. For example, a user might create a new medical form for a
patient and be unaware that data validation is performed by a script.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.1. Supporting Scripting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any part can have an associated script, either with the part as a whole or with
some intrinsic content in the part. Some examples where scripts might be
attached include: text fields, menu choices, push buttons, radio buttons, other
controls and graphic objects.

The user interface for attaching scripts to a part is defined by each part.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. Appendix ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This appendix details the various visuals used in OpenDoc for Link graphic
details, Frame states, Crop indicators and Pointers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Link Graphic Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following figure shows the link graphic that should be used for frames,
icons, and thumbnails. Note that different graphics should be used depending on
the display resolution.

Pixel View of Link Graphic

The following figure shows how the link graphic is attached to icons and
thumbnails. The picture on the right shows a source link, and the one on the
left a target link.

Link graphic position for icons, thumbnails, and mini-icons

The graphic indicating a link should be added to the active or selected border
or to the dotted line that indicates the link boundaries at the bottom of the
first quarter of the part's height, starting from the top. This position
minimizes the risk of conflict with resize handles. The gray border around the
graphic indicates a one-pixel clearance. Position of Link Graphic (Inactive
Part) - Low Resolution. and Position of Link Graphic (Active or Selected part)
- High Resolution. show the position of the link graphic in detail.

Position of Link Graphic (Active or Selected Part) - Low
Resolution

Position of Link Graphic (Inactive Part) - Low Resolution

Position of Link Graphic (Active or Selected part) - High
Resolution

Position of Link Graphic (Inactive Part) - High Resolution


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Active and Selected Frame Emphasis States ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following figures show the pixel-wise view of selected and active frame
borders. Note that if an active frame cannot be sized it should not have a gap
in the border as shown below.

Frame Borders for Low-resolution Displays

Frame Borders for High-resolution Displays


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Crop Indicators ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following figures show the positioning of crop-mark indicators.

Crop Indicators for High-resolution Displays

Crop Indicators for Low-resolution Displays


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Pointer Graphics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following figure shows the pointers to be used in OpenDoc. The pointers
shown in gray are new to OS/2.

Pointers used for OpenDoc


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Notices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.1. Edition Notices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

First Edition (December 1995)

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country
where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:  INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states
do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time.

It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information
about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are
not announced in your country.  Such references or information must not be
construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming,
or services in your country.

Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your
IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.2. Copyright Notices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(C) Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1995. All rights
reserved.
(C) Copyright Apple Computers, Inc 1995. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users - Documentation related to restricted rights -
Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP
Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not
imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM
operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended
to state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any
functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any
of IBM's intellectual property rights or other legally protectable rights may
be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and
verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or
services, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's
responsibility.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in
this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to
these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director
of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood NY 10594, U.S.A.

Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose
of enabling:  (i) the exchange of information between independently created
programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the
information which has been exchanged, should contact IBM Corporation,
Department RM1A, 1000 N.W. 51st Street, Boca Raton, FL 33431, U.S.A.  Such
information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,
including in some cases, payment of a fee.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.3. Trademarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States
or other countries:

AIX
Common User Access
CUA
IBM
OS/2
Personal System/2
Presentation Manager
System Applications Architecture
SAA
Workplace Shell

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

 Apple               Apple Computer, Inc.
 C++                 American Telephone and Telegraph Company
 Helvetica           Linotype Company
 Macintosh           Apple Computer, Inc.
 OpenDoc             Apple Computer, Inc.
 Palantino           Linotype Company

 Other company, product, and service names, which may be denoted by a double
 asterisk (Н**┘), may be trademarks or service marks of others.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. Glossary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This glossary defines many of the terms used in this book. It includes terms
and definitions from the IBM Dictionary of Computing, as well as terms specific
to the OS/2 operating system and the Presentation Manager. It is not a complete
glossary for the entire OS/2 operating system; nor is it a complete dictionary
of computer terms.

Other primary sources for these definitions are:

     The American National Standard Dictionary for Information Systems, ANSI
      X3.172-1990, copyrighted 1990 by the American National Standards
      Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036. These
      definitions are identified by the symbol (A) after the definition.

     The Information Technology Vocabulary, developed by Subcommittee 1, Joint
      Technical Committee 1, of the International Organization for
      Standardization and the International Electrotechnical Commission
      (ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1). Definitions of published parts of this vocabulary are
      identified by the symbol (I) after the definition; definitions taken from
      draft international standards, committee drafts, and working papers being
      developed by ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1 are identified by the symbol (T) after the
      definition, indicating that final agreement has not yet been reached
      among the participating National Bodies of SC1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.1. Glossary Listing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a starting letter of glossary terms:

 A    N
 B    O
 C    P
 D    Q
 E    R
 F    S
 G    T
 H    U
 I    V
 J    W
 K    X
 L    Y
 M    Z


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 accelerator
   In Common User Access architecture, a key or combination of keys that
   invokes an application-defined function.

 accelerator table
   A table used to define which key strokes are treated as accelerators and the
   commands they are translated into.

 access mode
   The manner in which an application gains access to a file it has opened.
   Examples of access modes are read-only, write-only, and read/write.

 access permission
   All access rights that a user has regarding an object. (I)

 action
   One of a set of defined tasks that a computer performs. Users request the
   application to perform an action in several ways, such as typing a command,
   pressing a function key, or selecting the action name from an action bar or
   menu.

 action bar
   In Common User Access architecture, the area at the top of a window that
   contains choices that give a user access to actions available in that
   window.

 action data
   Information stored in the undo object's action history that allows a part to
   reverse the effects of an undoable action.

 action history
   The cumulative set of reversible actions available at any one time,
   maintained by the undo object.

 action subhistory
   A subset of action data added to the undo object s action history by a part
   in a modal state. The part can then remove the subhistory from the action
   history without affecting earlier actions.

 action type
   A constant that defines whether an undoable action is a single-stage action
   (such as a cut) or part of a two-stage action (such as a drag-move).

 activate
   To make ready to receive the selection focus. A frame is activated when a
   mouse-down event occurs within it. On most platforms, a window is activated
   when it is to the front, or when the cursor passes over it.

 active frame
   The frame that has the selection focus and usually the keyboard focus.
   Editing takes place in the active frame; the selection  or insertion point
   is displayed within the frame.

 active part
   A part may be active or inactive. Being active means that the part contains
   the selection (or insertion cursor). For a part to be active, its contents
   must be visible, i.e., it must be displayed in a window or frame. Normally
   the active part receives commands and keyboard events, and its frame border,
   menu, palettes, and other user interface techniques are displayed.

   One part is active at a time. A part is made active by user actions such as
   clicking the mouse in its contents. When a part is activated, the previously
   active part, if any, becomes inactive. The frame border, menu, palettes,
   etc. of inactive parts are not displayed. Being inactive does not mean that
   a part isn't running. Parts may execute asynchronously whether they are
   active or inactive, even if they are displayed as icons.

   A part may not receive keyboard events nor put up its own menu or other user
   interface techniques when it is inactive.

 active program
   A program currently running on the computer.  An active program can be
   interactive (running and receiving input from the user) or noninteractive
   (running but not receiving input from the user). See also interactive
   program and noninteractive program.

 active shape
   A shape that describes the portion of a facet within which a part expects to
   receive user events. If, for example, an embedded part's used shape and
   active shape are identical, the containing part both draws and accepts
   events in the unused areas within the embedded part's frame.

 active window
   The window with which the user is currently interacting.

 American National Standard Code for Information Interchange
   The standard code, using a coded character set consisting of 7-bit coded
   characters (8 bits including parity check), that is used for information
   interchange among data processing systems, data communication systems, and
   associated equipment. The ASCII set consists of control characters and
   graphic characters. (A)

   Note:  IBM has defined an extension to ASCII code (characters 128-255).

 ancestor
   See superclass.

 anchor point
   A point in a window used by a program designer or by a window manager to
   position a subsequently appearing window.

 ANSI
   American National Standards Institute.

 APA
   All points addressable.

 API
   Application programming interface.

 application
   A collection of software components used to perform specific types of
   user-oriented work on a computer; for example, a payroll application, an
   airline reservation application, a network application. See also
   conventional application.

 application object
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a form that an application
   provides for a user; for example, a spreadsheet form. Contrast with user
   object.

 application programming interface (API)
   A functional interface supplied by the operating system or by a separately
   orderable licensed program that allows an application program written in a
   high-level language to use specific data or functions of the operating
   system or the licensed program.

 application result handler
   A result handler that is associated with a particular application. Compare
   with system result handler.

 application-modal
   Pertaining to a message box or dialog box for which processing must be
   completed before further interaction with any other window owned by the same
   application may take place.

 arbitrator
   An OpenDoc object that manages negotiation among parts about ownership of
   shared resources. Examples of such resources are the menu focus, selection
   focus, keystroke focus, and the serial ports.

 area
   In computer graphics, a filled shape such as a solid rectangle.

 ASCII
   American National Standard Code for Information Interchange.

 ASCIIZ
   A string of ASCII characters that is terminated with a byte containing the
   value 0.

 aspect ratio
   In computer graphics, the width-to-height ratio of an area, symbol, or
   shape.

 asynchronous (ASYNC)
   (1) Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the
   occurrence of specific events such as common timing signals. (T)  (2)
   Without regular time relationship;  unexpected or unpredictable with respect
   to the execution of program instructions. See also synchronous.

 atom
   A constant that represents a string. As soon as a string has been defined as
   an atom, the atom can be used in place of the string to save space. Strings
   are associated with their respective atoms in an atom table. See also
   integer atom.

 atom table
   A table used to relate atoms with the strings that they represent. Also in
   the table is the mechanism by which the presence of a string can be checked.

 atomic operation
   An operation that completes its work on an object before another operation
   can be performed on the same object.

 attribute
   A characteristic or property that can be controlled, usually to obtain a
   required appearance;  for example, the color of a line. See also graphics
   attributes and segment attributes.

 automatic link
   In Information Presentation Facility (IPF), a link that begins a chain
   reaction at the primary window. When the user selects the primary window, an
   automatic link is activated to display secondary windows.

 auxiliary storage unit
   An extra storage unit that a part uses to store its contents. Compare main
   storage unit.

 AVIO
   Advanced Video Input/Output.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - B ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 background
   (1) In multiprogramming, the conditions under which low-priority programs
   are executed. Contrast with foreground. (2) An active session that is not
   currently displayed on the screen.

 background color
   The color in which the background of a graphic primitive is drawn.

 background mix
   An attribute that determines how the background of a graphic primitive is
   combined with the existing color of the graphics presentation space.
   Contrast with mix.

 background program
   In multiprogramming, a program that executes with a low priority. Contrast
   with foreground program.

 base class
   See superclass.

 base menu bar
   The menu bar that contains the menus shared by all parts in a document. The
   document shell installs the base menu bar; parts and their own menus and
   items.

 base object
   The object whose interface is extended by an extension object.

 Bento
   A document storage system, built on top of a platform's native file system,
   that allows for the creation, storage, and retrieval of compound documents.
   The OpenDoc storage system is based on Bento.

 BВzier curve
   (1) A mathematical technique of specifying smooth continuous lines and
   surfaces, which require a starting point and a finishing point with several
   intermediate points that influence or control the path of the linking curve.
   Named after Dr. P. BВzier. (2) (D of C) In the AIX Graphics Library, a cubic
   spline approximation to a set of four control points that passes through the
   first and fourth control points and that has a continuous slope where two
   spline segments meet. Named after Dr. P. BВzier.

 bias transform
   A transform that is applied to measurements in a part's coordinate system to
   change them into platform-normal coordinates.

 binding
   (1) In programming, an association between a variable and a value for that
   variable that holds within a defined scope. The scope may be that of a rule,
   a function call or a procedure invocation. (2) In OpenDoc, the process of
   selecting an executable code module based on type information.

 bit map
   A representation in memory of the data displayed on an APA device, usually
   the screen.

 block
   (1) A string of data elements recorded or transmitted as a unit. The
   elements may be characters, words, or logical records. (T)  (2) To record
   data in a block. (3) A collection of contiguous records recorded as a unit.
   Blocks are separated by interblock gaps and each block may contain one or
   more records. (A)

 block device
   A storage device that performs I/O operations on blocks of data called
   sectors. Data on block devices can be randomly accessed. Block devices are
   designated by a drive letter (for example, C:).

 blocking mode
   A condition set by an application that determines when its threads might
   block. For example, an application might set the Pipemode parameter for the
   DosCreateNPipe function so that its threads perform I/O operations to the
   named pipe block when no data is available.

 border
   (1) A visual indication (for example, a separator line or a background
   color) of the boundaries of a window. (2) For OpenDoc, see frame border.

 boundary determination
   An operation used to compute the size of the smallest rectangle that
   encloses a graphics object on the screen.

 boundary objects
   The elements, specified in a range descriptor record, that identify the
   beginning and end of the range. See also range descriptor record.

 breakpoint
   (1) A point in a computer program where execution may be halted. A
   breakpoint is usually at the beginning of an instruction where halts, caused
   by external intervention, are convenient for resuming execution. (T)  (2) A
   place in a program, specified by a command or a condition, where the system
   halts execution and gives control to the workstation user or to a specified
   program.

 buffer
   (1) A portion of storage used to hold input or output data temporarily. (2)
   To allocate and schedule the use of buffers. (A)

 bundled frame
   A frame which has the Bundled property set. The system treats a bundled
   frame as a single atomic object. Its contents cannot be selected. Any mouse
   click inside the frames contents selects the entire frame. This allows the
   frame to be easily manipulated as a whole.

 button
   A mechanism used to request or initiate an action.

 byte pipe
   Pipes that handle data as byte streams. All unnamed pipes are byte pipes.
   Named pipes can be byte pipes or message pipes. See byte stream.

 byte stream
   Data that consists of an unbroken stream of bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - C ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 cache
   A high-speed buffer storage that contains frequently accessed instructions
   and data; it is used to reduce access time.

 cached micro presentation space
   A presentation space from a Presentation-Manager-owned store of micro
   presentation spaces. It can be used for drawing to a window only, and must
   be returned to the store when the task is complete.

 CAD
   Computer-Aided Design.

 call
   (1) The action of bringing a computer program, a routine, or a subroutine
   into effect, usually by specifying the entry conditions and jumping to an
   entry point. (I)  (A)  (2) To transfer control to a procedure, program,
   routine, or subroutine.

 calling sequence
   A sequence of instructions together with any associated data necessary to
   execute a call. (T)

 Cancel
   An action that removes the current window or menu without processing it, and
   returns the previous window.

 canvas
   The platform-specific drawing environment on which frames are laid out. Each
   window or printing device has one drawing canvas. See also static canvas and
   dynamic canvas. See drawing canvas.

 cascaded menu
   In the OS/2 operating system, a menu that appears when the arrow to the
   right of a cascading choice is selected. It contains a set of choices that
   are related to the cascading choice. Cascaded menus are used to reduce the
   length of a menu. See also cascading choice.

 cascading choice
   In Common User Access architecture, a choice in a menu that, when selected,
   produces a cascaded menu containing other choices.  An arrow () appears to
   the right of the cascading choice.

 CASE statement
   In PM programming, provides the body of a window procedure. There is usually
   one CASE statement for each message type supported by an application.

 category
   See part category.

 CGA
   Color graphics adapter.

 chained list
   A list in which the data elements may be dispersed but in which each data
   element contains information for locating the next. (T)  Synonymous with
   linked list.

 character
   A letter, digit, or other symbol.

 character box
   In computer graphics, the boundary that defines, in world coordinates, the
   horizontal and vertical space occupied by a single character from a
   character set. See also character mode. Contrast with character cell.

 character cell
   The physical, rectangular space in which any single character is displayed
   on a screen or printer device. Position is addressed by row and column
   coordinates. Contrast with character box.

 character code
   The means of addressing a character in a character set, sometimes called
   code point.

 character device
   A device that performs I/O operations on one character at a time. Because
   character devices view data as a stream of bytes, character-device data
   cannot be randomly accessed. Character devices include the keyboard, mouse,
   and printer, and are referred to by name.

 character mode
   A mode that, in conjunction with the font type, determines the extent to
   which graphics characters are affected by the character box, shear, and
   angle attributes.

 character set
   (1) An ordered set of unique representations called characters; for example,
   the 26 letters of English alphabet, Boolean 0 and 1, the set of symbols in
   the Morse code, and the 128 ASCII characters. (A)  (2) All the valid
   characters for a programming language or for a computer system. (3) A group
   of characters used for a specific reason; for example, the set of characters
   a printer can print.

 check box
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a square box with associated
   text that represents a choice. When a user selects a choice, an X appears in
   the check box to indicate that the choice is in effect. The user can clear
   the check box by selecting the choice again. Contrast with radio button.

 check mark
   (1) (D of C) In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a symbol that
   shows that a choice is currently in effect. (2) The symbol that is used to
   indicate a selected item on a pull-down menu.

 child class
   See subclass.

 child process
   In the OS/2 operating system, a process started by another process, which is
   called the parent process. Contrast with parent process.

 child window
   A window that appears within the border of its parent window (either a
   primary window or another child window). When the parent window is resized,
   moved, or destroyed, the child window also is resized, moved, or destroyed;
   however, the child window can be moved or resized independently from the
   parent window, within the boundaries of the parent window. Contrast with
   parent window.

 choice
   (1) An option that can be selected. The choice can be presented as text, as
   a symbol (number or letter), or as an icon (a pictorial symbol). (2) (D of
   C) In Common User Access architecture, an item that a user can select.

 chord
   (1) To press more than one button on a pointing device while the pointer is
   within the limits that the user has specified for the operating environment.
   (2) (D of C) In graphics, a short line segment whose end points lie on a
   circle. Chords are a means for producing a circular image from straight
   lines. The higher the number of chords per circle, the smoother the circular
   image.

 CI Labs
   See Component Integration Laboratories.

 class
   In object-oriented design or programming, a group of objects that share a
   common definition and that therefore share common properties, operations,
   and behavior. Members of the group are called instances of the class.

 class hierarchy
   The structure by which classes are related through inheritance.

 class method
   In System Object Model, an action that can be performed on a class object.
   Synonymous with factory method.

 class object
   In System Object Model, the run-time implementation of a class.

 class style
   The set of properties that apply to every window in a window class.

 client
   (1) A functional unit that receives shared services from a server. (T)  (2)
   A user, as in a client process that uses a named pipe or queue that is
   created and owned by a server process.

 client application
   An application that uses OSA events to request a service (for example,
   printing a list of files, checking the spelling of a list of words, or
   performing a numeric calculation) from another application (called a server
   application). These applications can reside on the same local computer or on
   remote computers connected to a network.

 client area
   The part of the window, inside the border, that is below the menu bar. It is
   the user's work space, where a user types information and selects choices
   from selection fields.  In primary windows, it is where an application
   programmer presents the objects that a user works on.

 client program
   An application that creates and manipulates instances of classes.

 client window
   The window in which the application displays output and receives input. This
   window is located inside the frame window, under the window title bar and
   any menu bar, and within any scroll bars.

 clip limits
   The area of the paper that can be reached by a printer or plotter.

 clip shape
   The structure by which classes are related through inheritance.

 clipboard
   In Common User Access architecture, an area of computer memory, or storage,
   that temporarily holds data. Data in the clipboard is available to other
   applications.

 clipboard focus
   In OpenDoc, a designation of ownership of access to the clipboard. The part
   with the clipboard focus can read from and write to the clipboard.

 clipping
   In computer graphics, removing those parts of a display image that lie
   outside a given boundary.  (I)  (A)

 clipping area
   The area in which the window can paint.

 clipping path
   A clipping boundary in world-coordinate space.

 clock tick
   The minimum unit of time that the system tracks. If the system timer
   currently counts at a rate of X Hz, the system tracks the time every 1/X of
   a second. Also known as time tick.

 clone
   To copy an object and all its referenced objects. When you clone an object,
   that object plus all other objects to which there is a strong persistent
   reference in the cloned object are copied.

 close
   For a frame, to remove from memory but not from storage. A closed frame is
   not permanently removed from its document. Compare remove.

 code page
   An assignment of graphic characters and control-function meanings to all
   code points.

 code point
   (1) Synonym for character code. (2) (D of C) A 1-byte code representing one
   of 256 potential characters.

 code segment
   An executable section of programming code within a load module.

 color dithering
   See dithering.

 color graphics adapter (CGA)
   An adapter that simultaneously provides four colors and is supported by all
   IBM Personal Computer and Personal System/2 models.

 command
   The name and parameters associated with an action that a program can
   perform.

 command area
   An area composed of a command field prompt and a command entry field.

 command entry field
   An entry field in which users type commands.

 command line
   On a display screen, a display line, sometimes at the bottom of the screen,
   in which only commands can be entered.

 command mode
   A state of a system or device in which the user can enter commands.

 command prompt
   A field prompt showing the location of the command entry field in a panel.

 Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA)
   A standard promulgated by the Object Management Group industry consortium
   for defining interactions among objects.

 Common Programming Interface (CPI)
   Definitions of those application development languages and services that
   have, or are intended to have, implementations on and a high degree of
   commonality across the SAA environments. One of the three SAA architectural
   areas. See also Common User Access architecture.

 Common User Access (CUA) architecture
   Guidelines for the dialog between a human and a workstation or terminal. One
   of the three SAA architectural areas. See also Common Programming Interface.

 compile
   To translate a program written in a higher-level

 compiled script file
   A script file with the file type 'scpt' that contains script data as a
   resource of type 'scpt'. Before executing the script in a compiled script
   file, a user must first open the script from an application such as Script
   Editor.

 component
   (1) Hardware or software that is part of a functional unit. A functional
   part of an operating system;  for example, the scheduler or supervisor. (2)
   A set of modules that performs a major function within a system;  for
   example, a compiler or a master scheduler. (3) A software product that
   functions in the OpenDoc environment. Part editors, part viewers, and
   services are examples of components. See also application component, service
   component.

 Component Integration Laboratories (CI Labs)
   A consortium of platform and application vendors that oversees the
   development and distribution of OpenDoc technology.

 composite window
   A window composed of other windows (such as a frame window, frame-control
   windows, and a client window) that are kept together as a unit and that
   interact with each other.

 compound document
   A single document containing multiple, heterogeneous data types, each
   created, presented and edited by its own software. A compound document is
   made up of parts.

 computer-aided design (CAD)
   The use of a computer to design or change a product, tool, or machine, such
   as using a computer for drafting or illustrating.

 COM1, COM2, COM3
   Character-device names reserved for serial ports 1 through 3.

 CON
   Character-device name reserved for the console keyboard and screen.

 concrete class
   A class designed to be instantiated. Compare with abstract class.

 conditional cascaded menu
   A pull-down menu associated with a menu item that has a cascade mini-push
   button beside it in an object's pop-up menu. The conditional cascaded menu
   is displayed when the user selects the mini-push button.

 container
   (1) In Common User Access architecture, an object that holds other objects.
   A folder is an example of a container object. (2) A holder of persistent
   data (documents); part of the OpenDoc container suite. (3) An OSA event
   object that contains another OSA event object. A container is specified in
   an object specifier record by a keyword-specified descriptor record with the
   keyword keyAEContainer. The keyword-specified descriptor record is usually
   another object specifier record. It can also be a null descriptor record, or
   it can be used much like a variable when the OSA Event Manager determines a
   range or performs a series of tests. The objects a container contains can be
   either elements or properties. (See also OSA event object, element, object
   specifier record, property, container part,, folder and object.

 container hierarchy
   The chain of containers that determine the location of one or more OSA event
   objects. See also container.

 container part
   A part that is capable of embedding other parts or links to other parts.
   Compare with simple part. See embedding part.

 containing part
   The part that immediately contains an embedded part. Each embedded part has
   one containing part; each containing part has one or more embedded parts.

 container suite
   A set of OpenDoc classes that implement persistent storage. The container
   suite consists of containers, documents, drafts, and storage units.

 containment
   A relationship between objects wherein an object of one class contains a
   reference to an object of another class. Compare with inheritance.

 content
   See part content.

 content area
   The potentially visible area of a part as viewed in a frame or window. If
   the content area is greater than the area of the frame or window, only a
   portion of the part can be viewed at a time.

 content coordinate space
   The coordinate space defined by applying the internal transform of a frame
   to a point in frame coordinate space.

 content element
   A data item that can be seen by the user and is presented by a part's
   content model. Content elements can be manipulated through the graphical or
   scripting interface to a part.

 content extent
   The vertical dimension of the content area of a part in a frame. Content
   extent is used to calculate bias transforms.

 content model
   The specification of a part's contents (the data types of its content
   elements) and its content operations (the actions that can be performed on
   it and the interactions among its content elements).

 content object
   A content element that can be represented as an object and thus accessed and
   manipulated through semantic events.

 content operation
   A user action that manipulates a content element.

 content storage unit
   The main storage unit of the Clipboard, drag-and-drop object, link source
   object, or link object.

 contextual help
   In Common User Access Architecture, help that gives specific information
   about the item the cursor is on. The help is contextual because it provides
   information about a specific item as it is currently being used. Contrast
   with extended help.

 contiguous
   Touching or joining at a common edge or boundary, for example, an unbroken
   consecutive series of storage locations.

 control
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a component of the user
   interface that allows a user to select choices or type information; for
   example, a check box, an entry field, a radio button.

 control area
   A storage area used by a computer program to hold control information. (I)  (A)

 Control Program
   (1) The basic functions of the operating system, including DOS emulation and
   the support for keyboard, mouse, and video input/output. (2) A computer
   program designed to schedule and to supervise the execution of programs of a
   computer system.  (I)  (A)

 control window
   A window that is used as part of a composite window to perform simple input
   and output tasks. Radio buttons and check boxes are examples.

 control word
   An instruction within a document that identifies its parts or indicates how
   to format the document.

 conventional application
   An application that directly handles events, opens documents, and is wholly
   responsible for manipulating, storing, and retrieving all of the data in its
   documents. Compare with application component.

 coordinate bias
   The difference between a given coordinate system and platform-normal
   coordinates. Coordinate bias typically involves both a change in axis
   polarity and an offset.

 coordinate space
   A two-dimensional set of points used to generate output on a video display
   of printer.

 Copy
   A choice that places onto the clipboard, a copy of what the user has
   selected. See also Cut and Paste.

 CORBA
   See Common Object Request Broker Architecture.

 correlation
   The action of determining which element or object within a picture is at a
   given position on the display. This follows a pick operation.

 coverpage window
   A window in which the application's help information is displayed

 CPI
   Common Programming Interface.

 critical extended attribute
   An extended attribute that is necessary for the correct operation of the
   system or a particular application.

 critical section
   (1) In programming languages, a part of an asynchronous procedure that
   cannot be executed simultaneously with a certain part of another
   asynchronous procedure.

   Note:  Part of the other asynchronous procedure also is a critical section.
   (2) A section of code that is not reentrant; that is, code that can be
   executed by only one thread at a time.

 CUA architecture
   Common User Access architecture. The architecture that defines the
   appearance of the user interface.

 current draft
   The most recent draft of a document. Only the current draft can be edited.

 current frame
   During drawing, the frame that is being drawn or within which editing is
   occurring.

 current position
   In computer graphics, the position, in user coordinates, that becomes the
   starting point for the next graphics routine, if that routine does not
   explicitly specify a starting point.

 cursor
   A symbol displayed on the screen and associated with an input device. The
   cursor indicates where input from the device will be placed. Types of
   cursors include text cursors, graphics cursors, and selection cursors.
   Contrast with pointer and input focus. Registrar to find out whether OSA
   events that already exist or are under development can be adapted to the
   needs of your application.

 customizable
   Characteristic of a scriptable part that also defines content objects and
   operations for interface elements such as menus and buttons.

 Cut
   In Common User Access architecture, a choice that removes a selected object,
   or a part of an object, to the clipboard, usually compressing the space it
   occupied in a window. See also Copy and Paste.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - D ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 daisy chain
   A method of device interconnection for determining interrupt priority by
   connecting the interrupt sources serially.

 database extension
   The interface between the Data Access Manager and a data server.

 data segment
   A nonexecutable section of a program module; that is, a section of a program
   that contains data definitions.

 data server
   An application that acts as an interface between a database extension on a
   personal computer and a data source, which can be on the personal computer
   or on a remote host computer. A data server can be a database server program
   that can provide an interface to a variety of different databases, or it can
   be the data source itself, such as an application program.

 data transfer
   The movement of data from one object to another by way of the clipboard or
   by direct manipulation.

 DBCS
   Double-byte character set.

 DDE
   Dynamic data exchange.

 deadlock
   (1) Unresolved contention for the use of a resource. (2) An error condition
   in which processing cannot continue because each of two elements of the
   process is waiting for an action by, or a response from, the other. (3) An
   impasse that occurs when multiple processes are waiting for the availability
   of a resource that will not become available because it is being held by
   another process that is in a similar wait state.

 debug
   To detect, diagnose, and eliminate errors in programs. (T)

 decipoint
   In printing, one tenth of a point.  There are 72 points in an inch.

 default container
   The outermost container in an application's container hierarchy; usually the
   application itself. See also container hierarchy.

 default editor for kind
   A user-specified choice of part editor to use with parts whose preferred
   editor is not present.

 default procedure
   A function provided by the Presentation Manager Interface that may be used
   to process standard messages from dialogs or windows.

 default value
   A value assumed when no value has been specified. Synonymous with assumed
   value. For example, in the graphics programming interface, the default
   line-type is 'solid'.

 definition list
   A type of list that pairs a term and its description.

 delta
   An application-defined threshold, or number of container items, from either
   end of the list.

 derived class
   See subclass.

 descendant
   See child process and subclass.

 descriptive text
   Text used in addition to a field prompt to give more information about a
   field.

 Deselect all
   A choice that cancels the selection of all of the objects that have been
   selected in that window.

 desktop window
   The window, corresponding to the physical device, against which all other
   types of windows are established.

 destination content
   The content at the destination of a link. It is a copy of the source
   content.

 destination part
   A part that displays, through a link, information that resides in another
   part. Compare with source part.

 detached process
   A background process that runs independent of the parent process.

 detent
   A point on a slider that represents an exact value to which a user can move
   the slider arm.

 device context
   A logical description of a data destination such as memory, metafile,
   display, printer, or plotter. See also direct device context, information
   device context, memory device context, metafile device context, queued
   device context, and screen device context.

 device driver
   A file that contains the code needed to attach and use a device such as a
   display, printer, or plotter.

 device space
   (1) Coordinate space in which graphics are assembled after all GPI
   transformations have been applied. Device space is defined in
   device-specific units. (2) (D of C) In computer graphics, a space defined by
   the complete set of addressable points of a display device. (A)

 dialog
   The interchange of information between a computer and its user through a
   sequence of requests by the user and the presentation of responses by the
   computer.

 dialog box
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a movable window, fixed in
   size, containing controls that a user uses to provide information required
   by an application so that it can continue to process a user request. See
   also message box, primary window, secondary window. Also known as a pop-up
   window.

 Dialog Box Editor
   A WYSIWYG editor that creates dialog boxes for communicating with the
   application user.

 dialog item
   A component (for example, a menu or a button) of a dialog box. Dialog items
   are also used when creating dialog templates.

 dialog procedure
   A dialog window that is controlled by a window procedure. It is responsible
   for responding to all messages sent to the dialog window.

 dialog tag language
   A markup language used by the DTL compiler to create dialog objects.

 dialog template
   The definition of a dialog box, which contains details of its position,
   appearance, and window ID, and the window ID of each of its child windows.

 direct parameter
   The parameter in an OSA event that contains the data or object specifier
   record to be used by the server application. For example, a list of
   documents to be opened is specified in the direct parameter of the Open
   Documents event. See also OSA event parameter.

 direct device context
   A logical description of a data destination that is a device other than the
   screen (for example, a printer or plotter), and where the output is not to
   go through the spooler. Its purpose is to satisfy queries. See also device
   context.

 direct manipulation
   The user's ability to interact with an object by using the mouse, typically
   by dragging an object around on the Desktop and dropping it on other
   objects.

 direct memory access (DMA)
   A technique for moving data directly between main storage and peripheral
   equipment without requiring processing of the data by the processing unit.(T)

 directory
   A type of file containing the names and controlling information for other
   files or other directories.

 dispatcher
   The OpenDoc object that directs user events and semantic events to the
   correct part.

 dispatch module
   An OpenDoc object used by the dispatcher to dispatch events of a certain
   type to part editors.

 display frame
   A frame in which a part is displayed. A part's display frames are created by
   and embedded in its containing part. Compare embedded frame.

 display-frames list
   A part's list of all the frames in which it is displayed. If a part is
   displayed in only one frame, it has only one element in this list.

 display point
   Synonym for pel.

 display property
   A visual characteristic of a containing part, such as its text font, that it
   makes available for embedded parts to adopt. Embedded parts can adopt the
   display characteristics of their containing parts that they understand, thus
   giving a more uniform appearance to a set of parts. Display properties are
   stored as properties in a storage unit passed from containing part to
   embedded part.

 Distributed SOM (DSOM)
   Distributed System Object Model. A version of SOM that provides remote
   access to SOM objects in a transparent way that insulates client programmers
   from having to know the location or platform type where a target object will
   be instantiated. DSOM allows programmers to use the same object model
   independently of whether the objects they access are in the same process, in
   another process on the same machine, or across distributed networks.

 dithering
   (1) The process used in color displays whereby every other pel is set to one
   color, and the intermediate pels are set to another. Together they produce
   the effect of a third color at normal viewing distances. This process can
   only be used on solid areas of color; it does not work, for example, on
   narrow lines. (2) (D of C ) In computer graphics, a technique of
   interleaving dark and light pixels so that the resulting image looks
   smoothly shaded when viewed from a distance.

 DMA
   Direct memory access.

 document
   In OpenDoc, a user-organized collection of parts, all stored together.

 document part
   A part whose purpose is to present information to people and allow that
   information to be edited, such as a text document or a graphics document.
   The preferred representation for parts contained inside them is as frames.
   The name of the Document menu may be changed to match the category of the
   part or a name associated with the category. For example, if you have a
   graphics document the Document menu bar choice could be change to Graphic.

 document process
   A thread of execution that runs the document shell program. The document
   process provides the interface between the operating system and part
   editors. It accepts events from the operating system, provides the address
   space into which parts are loaded, and provides access to the window system
   and other features.

 document shell
   A program that provides an environment for all the parts in a document. The
   shell maintains the major document global databases: storage, window state,
   arbitrator, and dispatcher. This code also provides basic document behavior
   such as document creation, opening, saving, printing, and closing. OpenDoc
   provides a default document shell for each platform.

 document window
   The window for a document part. A spreadsheet window is an example. Compare
   with part window.

 double-byte character set (DBCS)
   A set of characters in which each character is represented by two bytes.
   Languages such as Japanese, Chinese, and Korean, which contain more
   characters than can be represented by 256 code points, require double-byte
   character sets. Since each character requires two bytes, the entering,
   displaying, and printing of DBCS characters requires hardware and software
   that can support DBCS.

 draft
   A revision phase of a document on its way to becoming the final version. A
   document may have one or more drafts. Drafts appear in the Drafts view of a
   document.

 drag
   In Common User Access, to use a pointing device to move an object; for
   example, clicking on a window border, and dragging it to make the window
   larger.

 drag and drop
   A facility of OpenDoc that allows users to move or copy data through direct
   manipulation.

 drag-copy
   A drag-and-drop operation in which the dragged data remains at the source,
   and a copy is inserted at the destination.

 drag-move
   A drag-and-drop operation in which the dragged data is deleted from the
   source and inserted at the destination.

 dragging
   (1) In computer graphics, moving an object on the display screen as if it
   were attached to the pointer. (2) (D of C) In computer graphics, moving one
   or more segments on a display surface by translating.  (I)  (A)

 drawing canvas
   The platform-specific drawing environment on which frames are laid out. Each
   window or printing device has one drawing canvas. See also static canvas and
   dynamic canvas.

 drawing chain
   See segment chain.

 drop
   To fix the position of an object that is being dragged, by releasing the
   select button of the pointing device. See also drag.

 DSOM
   Distributed System Object Model. A version of SOM that works transparently
   over a network.

 DTL
   Dialog tag language.

 DTS
   Direct-To-SOM.

 dual-boot function
   A feature of the OS/2 operating system that allows the user to start DOS
   from within the operating system, or an OS/2 session from within DOS.

 duplex
   Pertaining to communication in which data can be sent and received at the
   same time. Synonymous with full duplex.

 dynamic canvas
   A drawing canvas that can potentially be changed, such as a window, that can
   be scrolled or paged to display different portions of a part' data. Compare
   with static canvas.

 dynamic data exchange (DDE)
   A message protocol used to communicate between applications that share data.
   The protocol uses shared memory as the means of exchanging data between
   applications.

 dynamic data formatting
   A formatting procedure that enables you to incorporate text, bit maps or
   metafiles in an IPF window at execution time.

 dynamic link library
   A collection of executable programming code and data that is bound to an
   application at load time or run time, rather than during linking. The
   programming code and data in a dynamic link library can be shared by several
   applications simultaneously.

 dynamic linking
   The process of resolving external references in a program module at load
   time or run time rather than during linking.

 dynamic segments
   Graphics segments drawn in exclusive-OR mix mode so that they can be moved
   from one screen position to another without affecting the rest of the
   displayed picture.

 dynamic storage
   (1) A device that stores data in a manner that permits the data to move or
   vary with time such that the specified data is not always available for
   recovery. (A)  (2) A storage in which the cells require repetitive
   application of control signals in order to retain stored data. Such
   repetitive application of the control signals is called a refresh operation.
   A dynamic storage may use static addressing or sensing circuits. (A)  (3)
   See also static storage.

 dynamic time slicing
   Varies the size of the time slice depending on system load and paging
   activity.

 dynamic-link module
   A module that is linked at load time or run time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 EBCDIC
   Extended binary-coded decimal interchange code. A coded character set
   consisting of 8-bit coded characters (9 bits including parity check), used
   for information interchange among data processing systems, data
   communications systems, and associated equipment.

 edge-triggered
   Pertaining to an event semaphore that is posted then reset before a waiting
   thread gets a chance to run. The semaphore is considered to be posted for
   the rest of that thread's waiting period; the thread does not have to wait
   for the semaphore to be posted again.

 edit-in-place
   See in-place editing.

 editor of last resort
   The part editor that displays any part for which there is no available part
   editor on the system. The editor of last resort typically displays a gray
   rectangle representing the part's frame.

 editor properties
   A notebook, accessed through the Edit menu, in which the user can view and
   change properties for the part editor of the currently active part.

 EGA
   Extended graphics adapter.

 embed
   One part is inserted into the contents of another part. The inserted part
   maintains its part identity. The receiving part decides layout issues such
   as whether the new part overlaps existing parts in its contents. Compare
   with incorporate.

 embedded content
   Content displayed in an embedded frame. A containing part editor does not
   directly manipulate embedded content. Compare with intrinsic content.

 embedded frame
   A frame within which an embedded part is displayed. The embedded frame
   itself is considered intrinsic content of the containing part; the part
   displayed within the frame is not.

 embedded-frames list
   A containing part's list of all the frames embedded within it.

 embedded part
   A part displayed in an embedded frame. The data for an embedded part is
   stored within the same draft as its containing part. An embedded part is
   copied during a duplication of its containing part. An embedded part may
   itself be a containing part, unless it is a nonembedding part.

 embedding part
   A part that is capable of embedding other parts within its content; that is,
   it is capable of being a containing part. Compare nonembedding part.

 EMS
   Expanded Memory Specification.

 encapsulation
   Hiding an object's implementation, that is, its private, internal data and
   methods. Private variables and methods are accessible only to the object
   that contains them.

 entry field
   In Common User Access architecture, an area where a user types information.
   Its boundaries are usually indicated. See also selection field.

 entry panel
   A defined panel type containing one or more entry fields and protected
   information such as headings, prompts, and explanatory text.

 entry-field control
   The component of a user interface that provides the means by which the
   application receives data entered by the user in an entry field. When it has
   the input focus, the entry field displays a flashing pointer at the position
   where the next typed character will go.

 environment segment
   The list of environment variables and their values for a process.

 environment strings
   ASCII text strings that define the value of environment variables.

 environment variables
   Variables that describe the execution environment of a process. These
   variables are named by the operating system or by the application.
   Environment variables named by the operating system are PATH, DPATH,
   INCLUDE, INIT, LIB, PROMPT, and TEMP. The values of environment variables
   are defined by the user in the CONFIG.SYS file, or by using the SET command
   at the OS/2 command prompt.

 error message
   An indication that an error has been detected. (A)

 event
   See user event. Compare semantic event.

 exclusive focus
   A focus that can be owned by only one frame at a time. The selection focus,
   for example, is exclusive; the user can edit within only one frame at a
   time. Compare non-exclusive focus.

 exclusive system semaphore
   A system semaphore that can be modified only by threads within the same
   process.

 executable file
   (1) A file that contains programs or commands that perform operations or
   actions to be taken. (2) A collection of related data records that execute
   programs.

 exit
   To execute an instruction within a portion of a computer program in order to
   terminate the execution of that portion. Such portions of computer programs
   include loops, subroutines, modules, and so on. (T)  Repeated exit requests
   return the user to the point from which all functions provided to the system
   are accessible. Contrast with cancel.

 expanded memory specification (EMS)
   Enables DOS applications to access memory above the 1MB real mode addressing
   limit.

 extended attribute
   An additional piece of information about a file object, such as its data
   format or category. It consists of a name and a value. A file object may
   have more than one extended attribute associated with it.

 extended help
   In Common User Access architecture, a help action that provides information
   about the contents of the application window from which a user requested
   help. Contrast with contextual help.

 extended-choice selection
   A mode that allows the user to select more than one item from a window. Not
   all windows allow extended choice selection. Contrast with multiple-choice
   selection.

 extension
   An OpenDoc object that extends the programming interface of another OpenDoc
   object. Part editors, for example, can provide additional interfaces through
   extensions. An object class that duplicates all the characteristics of an
   object class of the same name and adds some of its own. Like a word in a
   dictionary, a single object class ID can have several related definitions.

 extent
   Continuous space on a disk or diskette that is occupied by or reserved for a
   particular data set, data space, or file.

 externalize
   For a part or other OpenDoc object, to transform its in-memory
   representation into a persistent form in a storage unit. Compare
   internalize.

 external link
   In Information Presentation Facility, a link that connects external online
   document files.

 external transform
   A transform that is applied to a facet to position, scale, or otherwise
   transform the facet and the image drawn within it. Compare with internal
   transform.

 extracted draft
   A draft that is extracted from a document into a new document.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - F ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 facet
   An object that describes where a frame is displayed on a canvas.

 family-mode application
   An application program that can run in the OS/2 environment and in the DOS
   environment; however, it cannot take advantage of many of the OS/2-mode
   facilities, such as multitasking, interprocess communication, and dynamic
   linking.

 FAT
   File allocation table.

 FEA
   Full extended attribute.

 fidelity
   The faithfulness of translation attained (or attainable) between data of
   different part kinds. For a given part kind, other part kinds are ranked in
   fidelity by the level at which their editors can translate its data without
   loss.

 field-level help
   Information specific to the field on which the cursor is positioned. This
   help function is "contextual" because it provides information about a
   specific item as it is currently used; the information is dependent upon the
   context within the work session.

 FIFO
    First-in-first-out. (A)

 file
   A named set of records stored or processed as a unit. (T)

 file allocation table (FAT)
   In IBM personal computers, a table used by the operating system to allocate
   space on a disk for a file, and to locate and chain together parts of the
   file that may be scattered on different sectors so that the file can be used
   in a random or sequential manner.

 file attribute
   Any of the attributes that describe the characteristics of a file.

 file specification
   The full identifier for a file, which includes its drive designation, path,
   file name, and extension.

 file system
   The combination of software and hardware that supports storing information
   on a storage device.

 file system driver (FSD)
   A program that manages file I\O and controls the format of information on
   the storage media.

 fillet
   A curve that is tangential to the end points of two adjoining lines. See
   also polyfillet.

 filtering
   An application process that changes the order of data in a queue.

 first-in-first-out (FIFO)
   A queuing technique in which the next item to be retrieved is the item that
   has been in the queue for the longest time. (A)

 focus
   A designation of ownership of a shared resource such as menus, selection,
   keystrokes, and serial ports. The part that owns a focus has use of that
   shared resource.

 focus module
   An OpenDoc object used by the arbitrator to assign an owner or owners to a
   given focus type.

 focus set
   A group of foci requested as a unit.

 folder
   A container used to organize objects.

 font
   A particular size and style of typeface that contains definitions of
   character sets, marker sets, and pattern sets.

 Font Editor
   A utility program provided with the IBM Developers Toolkit that enables the
   design and creation of new fonts.

 foreground program
   (1) The program with which the user is currently interacting. Also known as
   interactive program. Contrast with background program. (2) (D of C) In
   multiprogramming,  a high-priority program.

 frame
   A representation for a part which displays the parts contents. It is the
   normal representation when a part is in a document window. The other
   possible representation is an icon.

 frame border
   A visible representation for a frame's shape. The border shows how clipping
   will occur and guides the positioning of contents inside the frame.

   The border of a frame is displayed when the frame is active or selected; the
   border is invisible when the frame is inactive.

 frame coordinate space
   The coordinate space in which a part's frame shape, used shape, active
   shape, and clip shape are defined. Compare content coordinate space. See
   also window coordinate space, canvas coordinate space.

 frame group
   A set of a part's display frames that it designates as related, for purposes
   such as flowing content from one frame to another. Each frame group has its
   own group ID; frames within a frame group have a frame sequence.

 frame negotiation
   The process of adjusting the size and shape of an embedded frame. Embedded
   parts can request changes to their frames, but the containing parts control
   the changes that occur.

 frame shape
   The area available for displaying the frames contents. A frames shape is
   normally rectangular, although it need not be. For example, a button might
   have rounded corners. Some applications may provide direct manipulation of
   the shape, others may provide indirect manipulation via a menu or property
   sheet; while still others may provide no control over the shape. It is not
   required that the user be given any control over the shape.

 frame styles
   Standard window layouts provided by the Presentation Manager.

 frame transform
   The composite transform that converts from a part's frame coordinates to its
   canvas coordinates

 frame view type
   A view type in which all or a portion of a part's contents is displayed
   within a frame, the border of which is visible when the part is active or
   selected. Other possible view types for displaying a part include large
   icon, small icon, and thumbnail. Frame view type is sometimes called content
   view type.

 FSD
   File system driver.

 full-duplex
   Synonym for duplex.

 full-screen application
   An application that has complete control of the screen.

 fully scriptable
   Characteristic of a scriptable part in which semantic events can invoke any
   action a user might be able to perform.

 function
   (1) In a programming language, a block, with or without formal parameters,
   whose execution is invoked by means of a call. (2) A set of related control
   statements that cause one or more programs to be performed.

 function key
   A key that causes a specified sequence of operations to be performed when it
   is pressed, for example, F1 and Alt-K.

 function key area
   The area at the bottom of a window that contains function key assignments
   such as F1=Help.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - G ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 global file-name character
   Either a question mark (?) or an asterisk (*) used as a variable in a file
   name or file name extension when referring to a particular file or group of
   files.

 glyph
   A graphic symbol whose appearance conveys information.

 GPI
   Graphics programming interface.

 graphic primitive
   In computer graphics, a basic element, such as an arc or a line, that is not
   made up of smaller parts and that is used to create diagrams and pictures.
   See also graphics segment.

 graphics
   (1) A picture defined in terms of graphic primitives and graphics
   attributes. (2) (D of C) The making of charts and pictures. (3) Pertaining
   to charts, tables, and their creation. (4) See computer graphics, coordinate
   graphics, fixed-image graphics, interactive graphics, passive graphics,
   raster graphics.

 graphics attributes
   Attributes that apply to graphic primitives. Examples are color, line type,
   and shading-pattern definition. See also segment attributes.

 graphics field
   The clipping boundary that defines the visible part of the presentation-page
   contents.

 graphics mode
   One of several states of a display. The mode determines the resolution and
   color content of the screen.

 graphics model space
   The conceptual coordinate space in which a picture is constructed after any
   model transforms have been applied. Also known as model space.

 Graphics programming interface
   The formally defined programming language that is between an IBM graphics
   program and the user of the program.

 graphics segment
   A sequence of related graphic primitives and graphics attributes. See also
   graphic primitive.

 graphics system
   A specific drawing architecture. Some graphics systems (such as Display
   PostScript) are available on more than one platform; some platforms support
   more than one graphics system.

 graying
   The indication that a choice on a pull-down is unavailable.

 group
   A collection of logically connected controls. For example, the buttons
   controlling paper size for a printer could be called a group. See also
   program group.

 group id
   In OpenDoc, a number that identifies a frame group, assigned by the group's
   containing part.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - H ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 handle
   (1) An identifier that represents an object, such as a device or window, to
   the Presentation Interface. (2) (D of C) In the Advanced DOS and OS/2
   operating systems, a binary value created by the system that identifies a
   drive, directory, and file so that the file can be found and opened.

 hard error
   An error condition on a network that requires either that the system be
   reconfigured or that the source of the error be removed before the system
   can resume reliable operation.

 header
   (1) System-defined control information that precedes user data. (2) The
   portion of a message that contains control information for the message, such
   as one or more destination fields, name of the originating station, input
   sequence number, character string indicating the type of message, and
   priority level for the message.

 heading tags
   A document element that enables information to be displayed in windows, and
   that controls entries in the contents window controls placement of push
   buttons in a window, and defines the shape and size of windows.

 heap
   An area of free storage available for dynamic allocation by an application.
   Its size varies according to the storage requirements of the application.

 help function
   (1) A function that provides information about a specific field, an
   application panel, or information about the help facility. (2) (D of C) One
   or more display images that describe how to use application software or how
   to do a system operation.

 Help index
   In Common User Access architecture, a help action that provides an index of
   the help information available for an application.

 help panel
   A panel with information to assist users that is displayed in response to a
   help request from the user.

 help window
   A Common User Access defined secondary window that displays information when
   the user requests help.

 hidden file
   An operating system file that is not displayed by a directory listing.

 hide button
   In the OS/2 operating system, a small, square button located in the
   right-hand corner of the title bar of a window that, when selected, removes
   from the screen all the windows associated with that window. Contrast with
   maximize button. See also restore button.

 hierarchical inheritance
   The relationship between parent and child classes. An object that is lower
   in the inheritance hierarchy than another object, inherits all the
   characteristics and behaviors of the objects above it in the hierarchy.

 hierarchy
   A tree of segments beginning with the root segment and proceeding downward
   to dependent segment types.

 high-performance file system (HPFS)
   In the OS/2 operating system, an installable file system that uses
   high-speed buffer storage, known as a cache, to provide fast access to large
   disk volumes. The file system also supports the coexistence of multiple,
   active file systems on a single personal computer, with the capability of
   multiple and different storage devices. File names used with the HPFS can
   have as many as 254 characters. OpenDoc uses HPFS.

 hit testing
   The means of identifying which window is associated with which input device
   event.

 hook
   A point in a system-defined function where an application can supply
   additional code that the system processes as though it were part of the
   function.

 hook chain
   A sequence of hook procedures that are "chained" together so that each event
   is passed, in turn, to each procedure in the chain.

 hot part
   A part, such as a control, that performs an action (like running a script),
   rather than activating itself, when it receives a mouse click.

 hot spot
   The part of the pointer that must touch an object before it can be selected.
   This is usually the tip of the pointer. Contrast with action point.

 HPFS
   high-performance file system.

 hypergraphic link
   A connection between one piece of information and another through the use of
   graphics.

 hypertext
   A way of presenting information online with connections between one piece of
   information and another, called hypertext links. See also hypertext link.

 hypertext link
   A connection between one piece of information and another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 I/O operation
   An input operation to, or output operation from a device attached to a
   computer.

 I-beam pointer
   A pointer that indicates an area, such as an entry field in which text can
   be edited.

 icon
   A representation for a part which displays a small picture along with a
   name. It is the normal representation when a part is in a desktop window. An
   icon can take the form of a regular icon, a small icon, or a thumbnail. The
   other possible representation is a frame.

 icon area
   In the Presentation Manager, the area at the bottom of the screen that is
   normally used to display the icons for minimized programs.

 Icon Editor
   The Presentation Manager-provided tool for creating icons.

 identity transform
   A transform that has no effect on points to which it is applied.

 IDL
   Interface Definition Language.

 image font
   A set of symbols, each of which is described in a rectangular array of pels.
   Some of the pels in the array are set to produce the image of one of the
   symbols. Contrast with outline font.

 implied length
   The definition of a specific length for a data type. An example of this is
   the Data Access Manager's typeInteger data type, which has a defined length
   of 4 bytes.

 incorporate
   To merge the data from one part into the contents of another part so that
   the merged data retains no separate identity as a part. Compare with embed.

 indirect manipulation
   Interaction with an object through choices and controls.

 information device context
   A logical description of a data destination other than the screen (for
   example, a printer or plotter), but where no output will occur. Its purpose
   is to satisfy queries. See also device context.

 information panel
   A defined panel type characterized by a body containing only protected
   information.

 Information Presentation Facility (IPF)
   A facility provided by the OS/2 operating system, by which application
   developers can produce online documentation and context-sensitive online
   help panels for their applications.

 inheritance
   The passing of class resources or attributes from a parent class downstream
   in the class hierarchy to a child class. The new class inherits all the data
   and methods of the parent class without having to redefine them.

 in-place editing
   Manipulation by a user of data in an embedded part without leaving the
   context of the document in which the part is displayed (for example, without
   opening a new window for the part).

 input focus
   (1) The area of a window where user interaction is possible using an input
   device, such as a mouse or the keyboard. (2) The position in the active
   window where a user's normal interaction with the keyboard will appear.

 input router
   An internal OS/2 process that removes messages from the system queue.

 input/output control
   A device-specific command that requests a function of a device driver.

 insertion location descriptor record
   A record of type typeInsertionLoc that consists of two keyword-specified
   descriptor records. The first is an object specifier record, and the data
   for the second is a constant that specifies the insertion location in
   relation to the OSA event object described by the object specifier record.

 inside-out activation
   A mode of user interaction in which a mouse click anywhere in a document
   activates the smallest possible enclosing frame and performs the appropriate
   selection action on the content element at the click location. OpenDoc uses
   inside-out selection. Compare outside-in activation.

 inside-out selection
   A mode of user interaction in which a mouse click anywhere in a document
   activates the smallest possible enclosing frame and performs the appropriate
   selection action on the content element at the click location. OpenDoc uses
   inside-out selection. Compare with outside-in selection.

 installable file system (IFS)
   A file system in which software is installed when the operating system is
   started.

 instance
   A single occurrence of an object class that has a particular behavior. See
   also object.

 instantiate
   (1) To make an instance of;  to replicate. (2) In object-oriented
   programming, to represent a class abstraction with a concrete instance of
   the class.

 instruction pointer
   A pointer that provides addressability for a machine interface instruction
   in a program.

 integer atom
   An atom that represents a predefined system constant and carries no storage
   overhead. For example, names of window classes provided by Presentation
   Manager are expressed as integer atoms.

 interactive graphics
   Graphics that can be moved or manipulated by a user at a terminal.

 interactive program
   (1) A program that is running (active) and is ready to receive (or is
   receiving) input from a user. (2) A running program that can receive input
   from the keyboard or another input device. Compare with active program and
   contrast with noninteractive program.

   Also known as a foreground program.

 interchange file
   A file containing data that can be sent from one application to another.

 Interface Definition Language (IDL)
   Language-neutral syntax created by IBM to describe the interface of classes
   that can be compiled by the SOM compiler.

 internalize
   For a part or other OpenDoc object, to transform its persistent form in a
   storage unit intto an appropriate in-memory representation. Compare
   externalize.

 internal transform
   A transform that positions, scales, or otherwise transforms the image of a
   part drawn within a frame. Compare with external transform.

 interoperability
   Access to an OpenDoc part or document from different platforms or with
   different software systems.

 interpreter
   A program that translates and executes each instruction of a high-level
   programming language before it translates and executes.

 interprocess communication (IPC)
   In the OS/2 operating system, the exchange of information between processes
   or threads through semaphores, pipes, queues, and shared memory.

 intrinsic content
   Data which is intrinsic to a particular type of part. For example, text
   parts contain characters. Graphics parts may contain lines and circles.
   Spreadsheet parts contain spreadsheet cells. Video parts contain digitized
   video. Sound parts contain digitized sound. Simulation parts contain
   executable code. And so on. The part developer determines what intrinsic
   contents a part may contain. See part content.

 invalid shape
   The area of a frame, facet, or canvas that needs redrawing. Update events
   cause redrawing of the invalid area.

 invalidate
   To mark an area of a canvas (or facet, or frame) as in need of redrawing.

 invariant
   An aspect of the internal state of an object that must be maintained for the
   object to behave properly according to its design.

 IPC
   Interprocess communication.

 IPF
   Information Presentation Facility.

 IPF compiler
   A text compiler that interpret tags in a source file and converts the
   information into the specified format.

 IPF tag language
   A markup language that provides the instructions for displaying online
   information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - J ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 journal
   A special-purpose file that is used to record changes made in the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - K ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Kanji
   A graphic character set used in Japanese ideographic alphabets.

 KBD$
   Character-device name reserved for the keyboard.

 kernel
   The part of an operating system that performs basic functions, such as
   allocating hardware resources.

 kerning
   The design of graphics characters so that their character boxes overlap.
   Used to space text proportionally.

 keyboard accelerator
   A keystroke that generates a command message for an application.

 keyboard augmentation
   A function that enables a user to press a keyboard key while pressing a
   mouse button.

 keyboard focus
   A temporary attribute of a window. The window that has a keyboard focus
   receives all keyboard input until the focus changes to a different window.

 Keys help
   In Common User Access architecture, a help action that provides a listing of
   the application keys and their assigned functions.

 keystroke focus
   A designation of ownership of keystroke events. The part whose frame has the
   keystroke focus receives keystroke events. See also selection focus.

 keystroke focus frame
   The frame to which keystroke events are to be sent.

 kind
   See part kind.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - L ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 label
   In a graphics segment, an identifier of one or more elements that is used
   when editing the segment.

 LAN
   local area network.

 large icon view type
   A view type in which a part is represented by a 32 by 32-pixel bitmap image.
   Other possible view types for displaying a part include small icon,
   thumbnail, and frame.

 layout
   The process of arranging frames and content elements in a document for
   drawing.

 lazy drag
   See pickup and drop.

 lazy drag set
   See pickup set.

 lazy instantiation
   The process of creating objects (such as embedded frames) in memory only
   when they are needed for display, such as when the user scrolls them into
   view. Lazy instantiation can help minimize the memory requirements of your
   parts.

 link
   A link is a relationship between two parts or pieces of part contents. A
   Link operation is like a Copy except that the link is updated every time the
   original changes. Links allow part contents to appear to be in two different
   places, even though it is only stored once. For instance, a document might
   link in a picture from another document, or a bar chart may display some
   data which is linked in from a row of a spreadsheet in the same document.
   Links may be within a part, between two parts in the same document, or
   between two parts in different documents. Both part contents and entire
   parts may be linked. Links are one way only. Linking is different from
   embedding or copying.

 link destination
   The portion of a part's content area that represents the destination of a
   link.

 link source
   The portion of a part's content area that represents the source of a link.

 link specification
   An object, placed on the Clipboard or in a drag-and-drop object, from which
   the source part (the part that placed the data) can construct a link if
   necessary.

 link status
   The link-related state (in a link source, in a link destination, or not in a
   link) of a frame.

 linked list
   Synonym for chained list.

 linked part
   A part (or a portion of a part's content data) that appears to the user to
   be embedded in one part, but it is actually embedded in a different part.
   Linked data is not copied when the link's containing part is duplicated; a
   new link is created instead.

 list box
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a control that contains
   scrollable choices from which a user can select one choice.

   Note:  In CUA architecture, this is a programmer term. The end user term is
   selection list.

 list button
   A button labeled with an underlined down-arrow that presents a list of valid
   objects or choices that can be selected for that field.

 list panel
   A defined panel type that displays a list of items from which users can
   select one or more choices and then specify one or more actions to work on
   those choices.

 load
   For a part editor, to transform the persistent form of a part in a draft
   into an appropriate in-memory representation, which can be a representation
   of the complete part or only a subset, depending on the current display
   requirements of the document. Compare with save.

 local area network (LAN)
   (1) A computer network located on a user's premises within a limited
   geographical area. Communication within a local area network is not subject
   to external regulations;  however, communication across the LAN boundary may
   be subject to some form of regulation. (T)

   Note:  A LAN does not use store and forward techniques. (2) A network in
   which a set of devices are connected to one another for communication and
   that can be connected to a larger network.

 lock
   A serialization mechanism by means of which a resource is restricted for use
   by the holder of the lock.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - M ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*

 main window
   The window that is positioned relative to the desktop window.

 manipulation button
   The button on a pointing device a user presses to directly manipulate an
   object.

 map
   (1) A set of values having a defined correspondence with the quantities or
   values of another set.  (I)  (A) (2) To establish a set of values having a
   defined correspondence with the quantities or values of another set.  (I)

 marker box
   In computer graphics, the boundary that defines, in world coordinates, the
   horizontal and vertical space occupied by a single marker from a marker set.

 marker symbol
   A symbol centered on a point. Graphs and charts can use marker symbols to
   indicate the plotted points.

 marquee box
   The rectangle that appears during a selection technique in which a user
   selects objects by drawing a box around them with a pointing device.

 Master Help Index
   In the OS/2 operating system, an alphabetic list of help topics related to
   using the operating system.

 maximize
   To enlarge a window to its largest possible size.

 media window
   The part of the physical device (display, printer, or plotter) on which a
   picture is presented.

 member function
   See method.

 memory block
   Part memory within a heap.

 memory device context
   A logical description of a data destination that is a memory bit map. See
   also device context.

 menu
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, an extension of the menu bar
   that displays a list of choices available for a selected choice in the menu
   bar. After a user selects a choice in menu bar, the corresponding menu
   appears. Additional pop-up windows can appear from menu choices.

 menu bar
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, the area near the top of a
   window, below the title bar and above the rest of the window, that contains
   choices that provide access to other menus.

 menu button
   The button on a pointing device that a user presses to view a pop-up menu
   associated with an object.

 message
   (1) In the Presentation Manager, a packet of data used for communication
   between the Presentation Manager interface and Presentation Manager
   applications (2) In a user interface, information not requested by users but
   presented to users by the computer in response to a user action or internal
   process. See also semantic event.

 message box
   (1) A dialog window predefined by the system and used as a simple interface
   for applications, without the necessity of creating dialog-template
   resources or dialog procedures. (2) (D of C) In Advanced Common User Access
   architecture, a type of window that shows messages to users. See also dialog
   box, primary window, secondary window.

 message filter
   The means of selecting which messages from a specific window will be handled
   by the application.

 message interface
   An OpenDoc object that provides an interface to allow parts to send messages
   (semantic events) to other parts, either in the same document or in other
   documents.

 message queue
   A sequenced collection of messages to be read by the application.

 metafile
   A file containing a series of attributes that set color, shape and size,
   usually of a picture or a drawing. Using a program that can interpret these
   attributes, a user can view the assembled image.

 metafile device context
   A logical description of a data destination that is a metafile, which is
   used for graphics interchange. See also device context.

 metalanguage
   A language used to specify another language. For example, data types can be
   described using a metalanguage so as to make the descriptions independent of
   any one computer language.

 method
   An function that manipulates the data of a particular class of objects.

 method override
   The replacement, by a child class, of the implementation of a method
   inherited from a parent and an ancestor class.

 mickey
   A unit of measurement for physical mouse motion whose value depends on the
   mouse device driver currently loaded.

 micro presentation space
   A graphics presentation space in which a restricted set of the GPI function
   calls is available.

 minimize
   To remove from the screen all windows associated with an application and
   replace them with an icon that represents the application.

 mix
   An attribute that determines how the foreground of a graphic primitive is
   combined with the existing color of graphics output. Also known as
   foreground mix. Contrast with background mix.

 mixed character string
   A string containing a mixture of one-byte and Kanji or Hangeul (two-byte)
   characters.

 mnemonic
   (1) A method of selecting an item on a pull-down by means of typing the
   highlighted letter in the menu item. (2) (D of C) In Advanced Common User
   Access architecture, usually a single character, within the text of a
   choice, identified by an underscore beneath the character. If all characters
   in a choice already serve as mnemonics for other choices, another character,
   placed in parentheses immediately following the choice, can be used. When a
   user types the mnemonic for a choice, the choice is either selected or the
   cursor is moved to that choice.

 modal dialog box
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a type of movable window, fixed
   in size, that requires a user to enter information before continuing to work
   in the application window from which it was displayed. Contrast with
   modeless dialog box. Also known as a serial dialog box. Contrast with
   parallel dialog box.

   Note:  In CUA architecture, this is a programmer term. The end user term is
   pop-up window.

 modal focus
   A designation of ownership of the right to display modal dialog boxes. A
   part displaying a modal dialog must first acquire the modal focus, so that
   other parts cannot do the same until the first part is finished.

 model space
   See graphics model space.

 modeless dialog box
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a type of movable window, fixed
   in size, that allows users to continue their dialog with the application
   without entering information in the dialog box. Also known as a parallel
   dialog box. Contrast with modal dialog box.

   Note:  In CUA architecture, this is a programmer term. The end user term is
   pop-up window.

 module definition file
   A file that describes the code segments within a load module. For example,
   it indicates whether a code segment is loadable before module execution
   begins (preload), or loadable only when referred to at run time
   (load-on-call).

 monitor
   A special use of a dispatch module, in which it is installed in order to be
   notified of events, but does not dispatch them.

 monolithic application
   See conventional application.

 mouse
   In CUA usage, a device that a user moves on a flat surface to position a
   pointer on the screen. It allows a user to select a choice o function to be
   performed or to perform operations on the screen, such as dragging or
   drawing lines from one position to another.

 multiple-choice selection
   In Basic Common User Access architecture, a type of field from which a user
   can select one or more choices or select none. See also check box. Contrast
   with extended-choice selection.

 multiple-line entry field
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a control into which a user
   types more than one line of information. See also single-line entry field.

 multitasking
   The concurrent processing of applications or parts of applications. A
   running application and its data are protected from other concurrently
   running applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - N ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 name space
   An object consisting of a set of text strings used to identify kinds of
   objects or classes of behavior, for registration purposes. For example,
   OpenDoc uses name spaces to identify part kinds and categories for binding.

 name-space manager
   An OpenDoc object that creates and deletes name spaces.

 national language support (NLS)
   The modification or conversion of a United States English product to conform
   to the requirements of another language or country. This can include the
   enabling or retrofitting of a product and the translation of nomenclature,
   MRI, or documentation of a product.

 nested list
   A list that is contained within another list.

 NLS
   national language support.

 nonembedding part
   A part that cannot itself contain embedded parts; that is, it can never be a
   containing part. Compare with embedding part.

 non-exclusive focus
   A focus that can be owned by more than one frame at a time. OpenDoc supports
   the use of nonexclusive foci. Compare with exclusive focus.

 noncritical extended attribute
   An extended attribute that is not necessary for the function of an
   application.

 nondestructive read
   Reading that does not erase the data in the source location. (T)

 noninteractive program
   A running program that cannot receive input from the keyboard or other input
   device. Compare with active program, and contrast with interactive program.

 nonpersistent frame
   A frame that exists as an object in memory, but has no storage unit and is
   not stored persistently.

 nonretained graphics
   Graphic primitives that are not remembered by the Presentation Manager
   interface when they have been drawn. Contrast with retained graphics.

 null character (NUL)
   (1) Character-device name reserved for a nonexistent (dummy) device. (2) (D
   of C) A control character that is used to accomplish media-fill or time-fill
   and that may be inserted into or removed from a sequence of characters
   without affecting the meaning of the sequence;  however, the control of
   equipment or the format may be affected by this character. (I)  (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - O ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 object
   A programming entity, existing in memory at run time, that is an individual
   instantiation of a particular class.

 object callback
   A function called by the name resolver to allow your part to provide extra
   information needed for semantic-event object resolution.

 object class ID
   A four-character code, which can also be represented by a constant, that
   identifies an object class for an OSA event object. The object class ID for
   a primitive object class is the same as the four-character value of its
   descriptor type.

 object class inheritance hierarchy
   The hierarchy of subclasses and superclasses that determines which
   properties, elements, and OSA events object classes inherit from other
   object classes.

 object-comparison function
   An object callback function that compares an element to either another
   element or to a descriptor record and returns either TRUE or FALSE.

 object-counting function
   An object callback function that counts the number of elements of a
   specified class in a specified container, so that the OSA Event Manager can
   determine how many elements it must examine to find the element or elements
   that pass a test.

 Object Interface Definition Language (OIDL)
   Specification language used in SOM Version 1 for defining classes. Replaced
   by Interface Definition Language (IDL).

 object linking and embedding (OLE)
   An application protocol developed by Microsoft Corporation that allows
   objects created by one application to be linked to or embedded in objects
   created by another application.

 object-marking function
   An object callback function called repeatedly by the OSA Event Manager to
   mark specific OSA event objects. See also marking callback functions.

 object model
   A feature of OSA events that allows a part to define a hierarchical
   arrangement of content objects to represent the elements of the part's
   content.

 object specifier
   A designation of a content object within a part, used to determine the
   target of a semantic event. Object specifiers can be names ("blue
   rectangle") or logical designations ("word 1 of line 2 of embedded frame
   3").

 object window
   A window that does not have a parent but which might have child windows. An
   object window cannot be presented on a device.

 OIDL
   Object Interface Definition Language.

 OLE
   See Object Linking and Embedding.

 open
   To start working with a file, directory, or other object.

 Open Linking and Embedding of Objects (OLEO)
   A technology that enables seamless interoperability between OpenDoc and
   Microsoft Corporation's Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) technology for
   interapplication communication. It allows OLE objects to function
   automatically as parts in OpenDoc documents, and OpenDoc parts to function
   automatically as OLE objects in OLE containers.

 Open Scripting Architecture (OSA)
   A mechanism based on the OSA Event Manager and the OSA Event Registry:
   Standard Suites that allows users to control multiple applications by means
   of scripts. The scripts can be written in any scripting language that
   supports the OSA.

 OpenDoc
   A multiplatform technology, implemented as a set of shared libraries, that
   uses component software to facilitate the construction and sharing of
   compound documents.

 ordered list
   Vertical arrangements of items, with each item in the list preceded by a
   number or letter.

 outline font
   A set of symbols, each of which is created as a series of lines and curves.
   Synonymous with vector font. Contrast with image font.

 output area
   An area of storage reserved for output. (A)

 outside-in activation
   A mode of user interaction in which a mouse click anywhere in a document
   activates the largest possible enclosing frame that is not already active.
   Compare inside-out activation.

 outside-in selection
   A mode of user interaction in which a mouse click anywhere in a document
   activates the largest possible enclosing frame that is not already active.
   compare inside-out selection.

 overlaid frame
   An embedded frame that floats above the content (including other embedded
   frames) of its containing part, and thus need not engage in frame
   negotiation with the containing part.

 override
   To replace a method belonging to a superclass with a method of the same name
   in a subclass, in order to modify its behavior.

 owner
   For a canvas, the part that created the canvas and attached it to a facet.
   The owner is responsible for transferring the results of drawing on the
   canvas to its parent canvas.

 owner window
   A window into which specific events that occur in another (owned) window are
   reported.

 ownership
   The determination of how windows communicate using messages.

 owning process
   The process that owns the resources that might be shared with other
   processes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 page
   (1) A 4KB segment of contiguous physical memory. (2) (D of C) A defined unit
   of space on a storage medium.

 page viewport
   A boundary in device coordinates that defines the area of the output device
   in which graphics are to be displayed. The presentation-page contents are
   transformed automatically to the page viewport in device space.

 paint
   (1) The action of drawing or redrawing the contents of a window. (2) In
   computer graphics, to shade an area of a display image;  for example, with
   crosshatching or color.

 panel
   In Basic Common User Access architecture, a particular arrangement of
   information that is presented in a window or pop-up. If some of the
   information is not visible, a user can scroll through the information.

 panel area
   An area within a panel that contains related information. The three major
   Common User Access-defined panel areas are the action bar, the function key
   area, and the panel body.

 panel area separator
   In Basic Common User Access architecture, a solid, dashed, or blank line
   that provides a visual distinction between two adjacent areas of a panel.

 panel body
   The portion of a panel not occupied by the action bar, function key area,
   title or scroll bars. The panel body can contain protected information,
   selection fields, and entry fields. The layout and content of the panel body
   determine the panel type.

 panel body area
   See client area.

 panel definition
   A description of the contents and characteristics of a panel. A panel
   definition is the application developer's mechanism for predefining the
   format to be presented to users in a window.

 panel ID
   In Basic Common User Access architecture, a panel identifier, located in the
   upper-left corner of a panel.  A user can choose whether to display the
   panel ID.

 panel title
   In Basic Common User Access architecture, a particular arrangement of
   information that is presented in a window or pop-up. If some of the
   information is not visible, a user can scroll through the information.

 paper size
   The size of paper, defined in either standard U.S. or European names (for
   example, A, B, A4), and measured in inches or millimeters respectively.

 parallel dialog box
   See modeless dialog box.

 parameter list
   A list of values that provides a means of associating addressability of data
   defined in a called program with data in the calling program. It contains
   parameter names and the order in which they are to be associated in the
   calling and called program.

 parent class
   See superclass.

 parent process
   In the OS/2 operating system, a process that creates other processes.
   Contrast with child process.

 parent window
   In the OS/2 operating system, a window that creates a child window. The
   child window is drawn within the parent window. If the parent window is
   moved, resized, or destroyed, the child window also will be moved, resized,
   or destroyed. However, the child window can be moved and resized
   independently from the parent window, within the boundaries of the parent
   window. contrast with child window.

 part
   The fundamental building blocks in OpenDoc. They are the primitives with
   which people accomplish tasks. Parts replace today's monolithic
   applications. All parts have contents and properties. Parts may be
   represented on the display screen as either icons or frames. Every part is
   contained in some other part, either a document part or a desktop part.
   Synonymous with document part.

 part category
   A set of part kinds. A category is a general classification of a parts
   contents; for example, text, 2D graphics, 3D graphics, table, sound, video,
   animation, simulation, script. Developers decide on the categories. OpenDoc
   uses them for two purposes: (1) to determine the set of part editors that
   are applicable to a given part, and (2) to decide if it is appropriate to
   translate data during inter-part editing. Compare with part kind.

 part container
   See container part.

 part content
   In general, a part can contain two types of data: intrinsic contents and
   other parts. There is no requirement that parts be able to do contain other
   parts, and some won't be able to. But a key characteristic of OpenDoc is
   that if a part can contain one kind of part, it can contain all kinds of
   parts, since OpenDoc supplies a uniform wrapper for parts. (Contrast this
   with the small number of standard data types supported today, such as text,
   PICT, TIFF, etc.) Compare with part editor; see also part.

 part editor
   Code that allows the user to modify the contents of a part. One of the main
   contributions of OpenDoc is giving users the ability to change part editors.
   This lets OpenDoc users employ their favorite editors for common types of
   data, such as text and graphics, regardless of how the data was created. See
   part viewer. Compare with part content, part viewer.

 part ID
   An identifier that uniquely names a part within the context of a document.
   This ID represents a storage unit ID within a particular draft of a
   document.

 part info
   (1) Part-specific data, of any type or size, used by a part editor to
   identify what should be displayed in a particular frame or facet and how it
   should be displayed. (2) Information about a given part that can be seen by
   the user and is displayed in a dialog box accessed through a menu command.

 part kind
   The format of a parts contents; for example, SurfWriter Text 3.0, SurfWriter
   Text 2.0, SurfPaint 1.2, SurfDraw 5.0. See part category.

 part kind
   A specific classification of the format of data handled by a part editor. A
   kind specifies the specific data format handled by, and possibly native to,
   a part editor. Kinds are meaningful to end-users and have designations such
   as such as 'MyEditor 2.0' or 'MyEditor 1.0'. Compare with part category.

 part properties
   Data which describe a part. The user may modify some properties, such as
   name, comments, and scripts. Other properties are set by the system, such as
   storage size, last modification date, and part type. Properties are
   displayed in the parts properties notebook. See also property.

 part registry
   The mechanism by which the document shell maps parts to part editors
   according to their part kind.

 part table
   A list of all the parts contained within a document and a list of associated
   data.

 part viewer
   Code that displays a parts contents. OpenDoc developers are urged to
   separate part viewers from part editors, so that viewers can be bundled with
   the contents when they are given to other people, e.g. via electronic mail.
   This allows the contents to at least be displayed, even if the user has not
   purchased the part editor. Compare with part editor.

 part window
   A window that displays an embedded part by itself, for easier viewing or
   editing. Any part that is embedded in another part can be opened up into its
   own part window. The part window is separate from and has a slightly
   different appearance than the document window that displays the entire
   document in which the part is embedded.

 partition
   (1) A fixed-size division of storage. (2) On an IBM personal computer fixed
   disk, one of four possible storage areas of variable size; one may be
   accessed by DOS, and each of the others may be assigned to another operating
   system.

 Paste
   A choice in the Edit pull-down that a user selects to move the contents of
   the clipboard into a preselected location. See also Copy and Cut.

 Paste As
   A choice in the Edit pull-down that a user selects to move the contents of
   the clipboard into a preselected location by means of a dialog box allowing
   the user to specify the format of the data. See also Copy and Cut.

 path
   The route used to locate files; the storage location of a file. A fully
   qualified path lists the drive identifier, directory name, subdirectory name
   (if any), and file name with the associated extension.

 PDD
   Physical device driver.

 peeking
   An action taken by any thread in the process that owns the queue to examine
   queue elements without removing them.

 pel
   (1) The smallest area of a display screen capable of being addressed and
   switched between visible and invisible states. Synonym for display point,
   pixel, and picture element. (2) (D of C) Picture element.

 persistence
   The quality of an entity such as a part, link, or object, that allows it to
   span separate document launches and transport to different computers. For
   example, a part unloaded to persistent storage is typically written to a
   hard disk.

 persistent object
   An object whose instance data and state are preserved between system
   shutdown and system startup.

 persistent reference
   A number, stored somewhere within a storage unit, that refers to another
   storage unit in the same document. Persistent references permit complex
   runtime object relationships to be stored externally, and later
   reconstructed.

 physical device driver (PDD)
   A system interface that handles hardware interrupts and supports a set of
   input and output functions.

 pick
   To select part of a displayed object using the pointer.

 pickup
   To add an object or set of objects to the pickup set.

 pickup and drop
   A drag operation that does not require the direct manipulation button to be
   pressed for the duration of the drag.

 pickup set
   The set of objects that have been picked up as part of a pickup and drop
   operation.

 picture chain
   See segment chain.

 picture element
   (1) Synonym for pel. (2) (D of C) In computer graphics, the smallest element
   of a display surface that can be independently assigned color and
   intensity. (T). (3) The area of the finest detail that can be reproduced
   effectively on the recording medium.

 PID
   Process identification.

 pipe
   (1) A named or unnamed buffer used to pass data between processes. A process
   reads from or writes to a pipe as if the pipe were a standard-input or
   standard-output file. See also named pipe and unnamed pipe. (2) (D of C) To
   direct data so that the output from one process becomes the input to another
   process. The standard output of one command can be connected to the standard
   input of another with the pipe operator (|).

 pixel
   (1) Synonym for pel. (2) (D of C) Picture element.

 platform
   The operating system environment in which a program runs. For example,
   OpenDoc is implemented on the Macintosh, Windows, and OS/2 platforms.

 platform-normal coordinates
   The native coordinate system for a particular platform. OpenDoc performs all
   layout and drawing in platform-normal coordinates; to convert from another
   coordinate system to platform- normal coordinates requires application of a
   bias transform.

 plotter
   An output unit that directly produces a hardcopy record of data on a
   removable medium, in the form of a two-dimensional graphic representation. (T)

 PM
   Presentation Manager.

 pointer
   (1) The symbol displayed on the screen that is moved by a pointing device,
   such as a mouse. The pointer is used to point at items that users can
   select. Contrast with cursor. (2) A data element that indicates the location
   of another data element. (T)

 pointing device
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, an instrument, such as a mouse,
   trackball, or joystick, used to move a pointer on the screen.

 pointings
   Pairs of x-y coordinates produced by an operator defining positions on a
   screen with a pointing device, such as a mouse.

 polyfillet
   A curve based on a sequence of lines. The curve is tangential to the end
   points of the first and last lines, and tangential also to the midpoints of
   all other lines. See also fillet.

 polygon
   One or more closed figures that can be drawn filled, outlined, or filled and
   outlined.

 polyline
   A sequence of adjoining lines.

 polymorphism
   The ability to have different implementations of the same method for two or
   more classes of objects.

 pop
   To retrieve an item from a last-in-first-out stack of items. Contrast with
   push.

 pop-up menu
   A menu that lists the actions that a user can perform on an object. The
   contents of the pop-up menu can vary depending on the context, or state, of
   the object.

 pop-up window
   (1) A window that appears on top of another window in a dialog. Each pop-up
   window must be completed before returning to the underlying window. (2) (D
   of C) In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a movable window, fixed
   in size, in which a user provides information required by an application so
   that it can continue to process a user request.

 port
   (1) A connection between the CPU and main memory or a device (such as a
   terminal) for transferring data. (2) A socket on the back panel of a
   computer where you plug in a cable for connection to a network or a
   peripheral device.

 port name
   A unique identifier for a particular application within a computer. The port
   name contains a name string, a type string, and a script code. An
   application can specify any number of port names for a single port so long
   as each name is unique. See also port.

 position code
   A parameter (to a storage unit's Focus method) with which you specify the
   desired property or value to access.

 preferences
   The mechanism through which the user assigns a part editor to a given part
   kind.

 preferred editor
   The part editor that last edited a part, or for whom the part's data was
   just translated. If a part's preferred editor is not present, OpenDoc
   attempts to bind the part to the user s default editor for kind or default
   editor for category.

 preferred kind
   The part kind that a part specifies as its highest-fidelity, preferred
   format for editing. It is the part kind stored as the first value in the
   contents property of the part's storage unit, unless the storage unit also
   contains a property of type kODPropPreferredKind specifying another value as
   the preferred kind.

 preferred representation
   A property of a view controlling the default representation for parts
   contained inside it: either frame or icon. A part pasted or dragged into the
   part will change its representation to the containing view preferred
   representation. The user may override this on a part-by-part basis. For
   document parts the default view setting is frame; for desktop parts the
   setting is icon.

 presentation
   A particular style of display for a part's content-for example, an outline
   or expanded style for text, or a wire-frame or solid style for graphic
   objects. A part can have multiple presentations, each with its own
   rendering, layout, and user-interface behavior. See also view type.

 presentation drivers
   Special purpose I/O routines that handle field device-independent I/O
   requests from the PM and its applications.

 Presentation Manager (PM)
   The interface of the OS/2 operating system that presents, in windows a
   graphics-based interface to applications and files installed and running
   under the OS/2 operating system.

 presentation page
   The coordinate space in which a picture is assembled for display.

 presentation space (PS)
   (1) Contains the device-independent definition of a picture. (2) (D of C)
   The display space on a display device.

 primary window
   In Common User Access architecture, the window in which the main interaction
   between the user and the application takes place. In a multiprogramming
   environment, each application starts in its own primary window. The primary
   window remains for the duration of the application, although the panel
   displayed will change as the user's dialog moves forward. See also secondary
   window.

 primitive
   In computer graphics, one of several simple functions for drawing on the
   screen, including, for example, the rectangle, line, ellipse, polygon, and
   so on.

 primitive attribute
   A specifiable characteristic of a graphic primitive. See graphics
   attributes.

 print job
   The result of sending a document or picture to be printed.

 privilege level
   A protection level imposed by the hardware architecture of the IBM personal
   computer.  There are four privilege levels (number 0 through 3).  Only
   certain types of programs are allowed to execute at each privilege level.
   See also IOPL code segment.

 procedure call
   In programming languages, a language construct for invoking -  --- Б
   execution of a procedure.

 process
   An instance of an executing application and the resources it is using.

 program
   A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and execute.

 program details
   Information about a program that is specified in the Program Manager window
   and is used when the program is started.

 program group
   In the Presentation Manager, several programs that can be acted upon as a
   single entity.

 program name
   The full file specification of a program. Contrast with program title.

 program title
   The name of a program as it is listed in the Program Manager window.
   Contrast with program name.

 promise
   A specification of data to be transferred at a future time. If a data
   transfer involves a very large amount of data, the source part can choose to
   put out a promise instead of actually writing the data to a storage unit.

 prompt
   A displayed symbol or message that requests input from the user or gives
   operational information; for example, on the display screen of an IBM
   personal computer, the DOS A> prompt. The user must respond to the prompt in
   order to proceed.

 properties notebook
   The dialog box that displays allowing users to view a part's properties and
   to change any user-settable properties. It also allows access to the part's
   editor properties.

 property
   (1) In the OpenDoc storage subsystem, a component of a storage unit. A
   property defines a kind of information (such as 'name' or 'contents') and
   contains one or more data streams, called values, that consist of
   information of that kind. Properties in a stored part are accessible without
   the assistance of a part editor. See also display property, and user
   property. (2) An OSA event object that defines some characteristic of
   another OSA event. object, such as its font or point size, that can be
   uniquely identified by a constant. The definition of each object class in
   the OSA Event Registry: Standard Suites lists the constants and class IDs
   for properties of OSA event objects belonging to that object class. For
   example, the constants pName and pBounds identify the name and boundary
   properties of OSA event objects that belong to the object class cWindow. The
   pName property of a specific window is defined by an OSA event object of
   object class cProperty, such as the word 'MyWindow,' which defines the name
   of the window. An OSA event object can contain only one of each of its
   properties, whereas it can contain many elements of the same element class.
   See also OSA event object, container, element classes.

 pull-down
   (1) An action bar extension that displays a list of choices available for a
   selected action bar choice. After users select an action bar choice, the
   pull-down appears with the list of choices. Additional pop-up windows may
   appear from pull-down choices to further extend the actions available to
   users. (2) (D of C) In Common User Access architecture, pertaining to a
   choice in an action bar pull-down.

 push
   To add an item to a last-in-first-out stack of items. Contrast with pop.

 push button
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a rectangle with text inside.
   Push buttons are used in windows for actions that occur immediately when the
   push button is selected.

 putback
   To remove an object or set of objects from the lazy drag set. This has the
   effect of undoing the pickup operation for those objects

 putdown
   To drop the objects in the lazy drag set on the target object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - Q ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 queue
   (1) A linked list of elements waiting to be processed in FIFO order. For
   example, a queue may be a list of print jobs waiting to be printed. (2) (D
   of C) A line or list of items waiting to be processed; for example, work to
   be performed or messages to be displayed.

 queued device context
   A logical description of a data destination (for example, a printer or
   plotter) where the output is to go through the spooler. See also device
   context.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - R ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 radio button
   (1) A control window, shaped like a round button on the screen, that can be
   in a checked or unchecked state. It is used to select a single item from a
   list. Contrast with check box. (2) In Advanced Common User Access
   architecture, a circle with text beside it. Radio buttons are combined to
   show a user a fixed set of choices from which only one can be selected. The
   circle is partially filled when a choice is selected.

 raster
   (1) In computer graphics, a predetermined pattern of lines that provides
   uniform coverage of a display space. (T)  (2) The coordinate grid that
   divides the display area of a display device.  (A)

 read-only file
   A file that can be read from but not written to.

 real mode
   A method of program operation that does not limit or prevent access to any
   instructions or areas of storage.  The operating system loads the entire
   program into storage and gives the program access to all system resources.
   Contrast with protect mode.

 realize
   To cause the system to ensure, wherever possible, that the physical color
   table of a device is set to the closest possible match in the logical color
   table.

 recordable
   A level of scripting support of a part. A recordable part allows the user to
   automatically convert user actions into scripts attached to the part.
   Compare with scriptable, tinkerable.

 reference phrase help
   In Common User Access architecture, highlighted words or phrases within help
   information that a user selects to get additional information.

 refresh
   To update a window, with changed information, to its current status.

 region
   A clipping boundary in device space.

 registry
   A dictionary that lists executable code modules and associated data by which
   they can be selected. Examples of a registry are part registry and scripting
   component registry.

 remote file system
   A file-system driver that gains access to a remote system without a block
   device driver.

 remove
   For a frame, to permanently delete it from its document, as well as from
   memory. Compare with close.

 resource
   The means of providing extra information used in the definition of a window.
   A resource can contain definitions of fonts, templates, accelerators, and
   mnemonics; the definitions are held in a resource file.

 resource file
   A file containing information used in the definition of a window.
   Definitions can be of fonts, templates, accelerators, and mnemonics.

 restore
   To return a window to its original size or position following a sizing or
   moving action.

 retained graphics
   Graphic primitives that are remembered by the Presentation Manager interface
   after they have been drawn. Contrast with nonretained graphics.

 reverse video
   (1) A form of highlighting a character, field, or cursor by reversing the
   color of the character, field, or cursor with its background; for example,
   changing a red character on a black background to a black character on a red
   background. (2) In Basic Common User Access architecture, a screen emphasis
   feature that interchanges the foreground and background colors of an item.

 revert
   To return a draft to the state it had just after its last save.

 REXX Language
   Restructured Extended Executor. A procedural language that provides batch
   language functions along with structured programming constructs such as
   loops; conditional testing and subroutines.

 RGB
   (1) Color coding in which the brightness of the additive primary colors of
   light, red, green, and blue, are specified as three distinct values of white
   light. (2) Pertaining to a color display that accepts signals representing
   red, green, and blue.

 roman
   Relating to a type style with upright characters.

 root facet
   The facet that displays the root frame in a document window.

 root frame
   The frame in which the root part of a document is displayed. The root frame
   shape is the same as the content area of the document window.

 root Part
   The top-level part in a window opened from a user accessible object found in
   the files system, for example, a document that resides in an OS/2 folder.
   Any part can be a root part. The root part establishes the basic editing
   behavior of the document. Note that a root part need not be an OpenDoc part.
   It could be an application that embeds OpenDoc parts. In this case it
   effectively replaces the OpenDoc document shell.

 root segment
   In a hierarchical database, the highest segment in the tree structure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - S ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 SAA
   Systems Application Architecture.

 save
   To write all the data of all parts of a document (draft) to persistent
   storage.

 SBCS
   Single-byte character set.

 screen
   In Basic Common User Access architecture, the physical surface of a display
   device upon which information is shown to a user.

 screen device context
   A logical description of a data destination that is a particular window on
   the screen. See also device context.

 script
   A sequence of written instructions that, when executed by a script
   interpreter, are converted to semantic events that manipulate parts.

 script editor
   An application that allows users to record, edit, save, and execute scripts;
   for example, the Script Editor application.

 script file
   A file in which a script is stored. A script file can be a compiled script
   file, a script application file, or a script text file.

 scriptable
   A level of scripting support of a part. A scriptable part is able to accept
   semantic events for its publicly published content objects and operations.
   Compare with tinkerable and recordable.

 scripting
   Writing and executing scripts to control the behavior of multiple
   applications.

 scroll bar
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a part of a window, associated
   with a scrollable area, that a user interacts with to see information that
   is not currently allows visible.

 scrollable entry field
   An entry field larger than the visible field.

 scrollable selection field
   A selection field that contains more choices than are visible.

 scrolling
   Moving a display image vertically or horizontally in a manner such that new
   data appears at one edge, as existing data disappears at the opposite edge.

 secondary window
   A window that contains information that is dependent on information in a
   primary window and is used to supplement the interaction in the primary
   window.

 sector
   On disk or diskette storage, an addressable subdivision of a track used to
   record one block of a program or data.

 segment
   See graphics segment.

 segment attributes
   Attributes that apply to the segment as an entity, as opposed to the
   individual primitives within the segment. For example, the visibility or
   detectability of a segment.

 segment chain
   All segments in a graphics presentation space that are defined with the
   'chained' attribute. Synonym for picture chain.

 segment priority
   The order in which segments are drawn.

 segment store
   An area in a normal graphics presentation space where retained graphics
   segments are stored.

 select
   (1) To mark or choose an item. Note that select means to mark or type in a
   choice on the screen; enter means to send all selected choices to the
   computer for processing. (2) In OpenDoc, to designate as the focus of
   subsequent editing operations. If the user selects an embedded part, that
   part's frame border takes on an appearance that designates it as selected.
   The embedded part's container is activated.

 select button
   The button on a pointing device, such as a mouse, that is pressed to select
   a menu choice.  Also known as button 1.

 selection cursor
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a visual indication that a user
   has selected a choice. It is represented by outlining the choice with a
   dotted box. See also text cursor.

 selection field
   (1) In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a set of related choices.
   See also entry field. (2) In Basic Common User Access architecture, an area
   of a panel that cannot be scrolled and contains a fixed number of choices.

 selection focus
   The location of editing activity. The part whose frame has the selection
   focus is the active part, and has the selection or insertion point. See also
   keystroke focus.

 semantic event
   A message sent to a part or one of its content elements. Semantic events
   pertain directly to the part's content model and can have meaning
   independent of the part's display context. For example, semantic events
   could direct a part to get, set, or delete data. Compare with user event.
   See also Open Scripting Architecture.

 semantic interface
   A set of OpenDoc objects that provides an interface to allow parts to
   receive messages (semantic events) from other parts, in the same document or
   in other documents.

 semantics
   The relationships between symbols and their meanings.

 semaphore
   An object used by applications for signalling purposes and for controlling
   access to serially reusable resources.

 separator
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a line or color boundary that
   provides a visual distinction between two adjacent areas.

 sequence number
   A number that defines the position of a frame in its frame group.

 serial dialog box
   See modal dialog box.

 serialization
   The consecutive ordering of items.

 serialize
   To ensure that one or more events occur in a specified sequence.

 serially reusable resource (SRR)
   A logical resource or object that can be accessed by only one task at a
   time.

 server application
   An application that responds to OSA events requesting a service or
   information sent by client applications or scripting components (for
   example, by printing a list of files, checking the spelling of a list of
   words, or performing a numeric calculation). OSA event servers and clients
   can reside on the same local computer.

 service
   An OpenDoc component that, unlike a part editor, is not primarily concerned
   with editing and displaying parts. Instead, it provides a service to parts
   or documents, using the OpenDoc extension mechanism. Spelling checkers or
   database-access tools, for example, can be implemented as services.

 session
   (1) A routing mechanism for user interaction via the console; a complete
   environment that determines how an application runs and how users interact
   with the application. OS/2 can manage more than one session at a time, and
   more than one process can run in a session. Each session has its own set of
   environment variables that determine where OS/2 looks for dynamic-link
   libraries and other important files. (2) (D of C) In the OS/2 operating
   system, one instance of a started program or command prompt. Each session is
   separate from all other sessions that might be running on the computer. The
   operating system is responsible for coordinating the resources that each
   session uses, such as computer memory, allocation of processor time, and
   windows on the screen. (3) A logical connection between two entities (such
   as an OS/2 program and a database server) that facilitates the transmission
   of information between the two entities. An application has the option to
   accept or reject a session request. Authentication of the requesting user
   may be required before a session can commence. See also authentication,
   message block, port.

 session ID
   A number that uniquely identifies a session.

 settings extension
   An OpenDoc extension class that you can use to implement a Properties
   notebook.

 shadow
   An object that refers to another object. A shadow is not a copy of another
   object, but is another representation of the object.

 shadow box
   The area on the screen that follows mouse movements and shows what shape the
   window will take if the mouse button is released.

 shape
   A description of a geometric area of a drawing canvas.

 shared data
   Data that is used by two or more programs.

 shared memory
   In the OS/2 operating system, a segment that can be used by more than one
   program.

 shared resource
   A facility used by multiple parts. Examples of shared resources are the menu
   focus, selection focus, keystroke focus, and serial ports. See also
   arbitrator.

 shear
   In computer graphics, the forward or backward slant of a graphics symbol or
   string of such symbols relative to a line perpendicular to the baseline of
   the symbol.

 shell
   (1) A software interface between a user and the operating system of a
   computer. Shell programs interpret commands and user interactions on devices
   such as keyboards, pointing devices, and touch-sensitive screens, and
   communicate them to the operating system. (2) Software that allows a kernel
   program to run under different operating-system environments.

 show as frame
   Displays a part as a frame. The space for the frame is obtained from the
   containing parts window or frame; it does not create a new window.

 show as icon
   Displays a part as an icon.

 shutdown
   The process of ending operation of a system or a subsystem, following a
   defined procedure.

 sibling
   A frame or facet at the same level of embedding as another frame or facet
   within the same containing frame or facet. Sibling frames and facets are
   z-ordered to allow for overlapping.

 sibling processes
   Child processes that have the same parent process.

 sibling windows
   Child windows that have the same parent window.

 simple list
   A list of like values; for example, a list of user names.  Contrast with
   mixed list.

 simple part
   A part that cannot itself contain embedded parts. Compare container part.

 single-byte character set (SBCS)
   A character set in which each character is represented by a one-byte code.
   Contrast with double-byte character set.

 slider box
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture: a part of the scroll bar that
   shows the position and size of the visible information in a window relative
   to the total amount of information available. Also known as thumb mark.

 small icon view type.
   A view type in which a part is represented by a 16 by 16 pixel bitmap image.
   Other possible view types for displaying a part include large icon,
   thumbnail, and frame.

 SOM
   See System Object Model.

 source content
   The content at the source of a link. It is copied into the link and then
   into the destination content.

 source data
   Statements in a scripting language that constitute an uncompiled script.

 source file
   A file that contains source statements for items such as high-level language
   programs and data description specifications.

 source frame
   (1) An embedded frame whose part that has been opened up into its own part
   window. (2) The frame to which other synchronized frames are attached.

 source part
   A part that contains information that is displayed in another part through a
   link. Compare with destination part.

 source statement
   A statement written in a programming language.

 spin button
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, a type of entry field that
   shows a scrollable ring of choices from which a user can select a choice.
   After the last choice is displayed, the first choice is displayed again.  A
   user can also type a choice from the scrollable ring into the entry field
   without interacting with the spin button.

 spline
   A sequence of one or more BВzier curves.

 split-frame view
   A display technique for windows or frames, in which two or more facets of a
   frame display different scrolled portions of a part's content.

 spooler
   A program that intercepts the data going to printer devices and writes it to
   disk. The data is printed or plotted when it is complete and the required
   device is available.  The spooler prevents output from different sources
   from being intermixed.

 stack
   A list constructed and maintained so that the next data element to be
   retrieved is the most recently stored. This method is characterized as
   last-in-first-out (LIFO).

 standard window
   A collection of window elements that form a panel. The standard window can
   include one or more of the following window elements: sizing borders, system
   menu icon, title bar, maximize/minimize/restore icons, action bar and
   pull-downs, scroll bars, and client area.

 static canvas
   A drawing canvas that cannot be changed after it has been rendered, such as
   a printer page. Compare with dynamic canvas.

 static control
   The means by which the application presents descriptive information (for
   example, headings and descriptors) to the user. The user cannot change this
   information.

 storage system
   The OpenDoc mechanism for providing persistent storage for documents and
   parts. The storage system object must provide unique identifiers for parts
   as well as cross-document links. It stores parts as a set of standard
   properties plus type-specific content data.

 style
   See window style.

 subdirectory
   In an IBM personal computer, a file referred to in a root directory that
   contains the names of other files stored on the diskette or fixed disk.

 subsystem
   A broad subdivision of the interface and capabilities of OpenDoc, involving
   one or more protocols (for example, OpenDoc subsystems include shell,
   storage, drawing, user events, and semantic events).

 swapping
   (1) A process that interchanges the contents of an area of real storage with
   the contents of an area in auxiliary storage. (I)  (A)  (2) In a system with
   virtual storage, a paging technique that writes the active pages of a job to
   auxiliary storage and reads pages of another job from auxiliary storage into
   real storage. (3) The process of temporarily removing an active job from
   main storage, saving it on disk, and processing another job in the area of
   main storage formerly occupied by the first job.

 switch
   (1) In CUA usage, to move the cursor from one point of interest to another;
   for example, to move from one screen or window to another or from a place
   within a displayed image to another place on the same displayed image. (2)
   In a computer program, a conditional instruction and an indicator to be
   interrogated by that instruction. (3) A device or programming technique for
   making a selection, for example, a toggle, a conditional jump.

 switch list
   See Task List.

 symbolic identifier
   A text string that equates to an integer value in an include file, which is
   used to identify a programming object.

 symbols
   In Information Presentation Facility, a document element used to produce
   characters that cannot be entered from the keyboard.

 synchronized frames
   Separate frames that display the same representation of the same part, and
   should therefore be updated together. In general, if an embedded part has
   two or more editable display frames of the same presentation, those frames
   (and all their embedded frames) should be synchronized.

 synchronous
   Pertaining to two or more processes that depend upon the occurrence of
   specific events such as common timing signals. (T)  See also asynchronous.

 System Menu
   In the Presentation Manager, the pull-down in the top left corner of a
   window that allows it to be moved and sized with the keyboard.

 System Object Model (SOM)
   A mechanism for language-neutral, object-oriented programming.

 system queue
   The master queue for all pointer device or keyboard events.

 system result handler
   A result handler that is available to all applications that use the system.
   Compare with application result handler.

 system-defined messages
   Messages that control the operations of applications and provides input an
   other information for applications to process.

 Systems Application Architecture (SAA)
   A set of IBM software interfaces, conventions, and protocols that provide a
   framework for designing and developing applications that are consistent
   across systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - T ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 table tags
   In Information Presentation Facility, a document element that formats text
   in an arrangement of rows and columns.

 tag
   (1) One or more characters attached to a set of data that contain
   information about the set, including its identification. (I)  (A)  (2) In
   Generalized Markup Language markup, a name for a type of document or
   document element that is entered in the source document to identify it.

 target object
   An object to which the user is transferring information.

 Task List
   In the Presentation Manager, the list of programs that are active. The list
   can be used to switch to a program and to stop programs.

 template
   A part that has the Templates property set. The newly created part is of the
   same type as the template and can contain new information generated during
   creation. The default drag operation of a template is Create. This allows
   documents containing boiler-plate to be easily used to create new documents.
   OpenDoc encourages developers to deliver their parts as templates.

 text
   Characters or symbols.

 text cursor
   A symbol displayed in an entry field that indicates where typed input will
   appear.

 text window
   Also known as the VIO window.

 text-windowed application
   The environment in which the operating system performs advanced-video input
   and output operations.

 thumb mark
   The portion of the scroll bar that describes the range and properties of the
   data that is currently visible in a window. Also known as a slider box.

 thumbnail view type
   A view type in which a part is represented by a large (64-by-64 pixels)
   bitmap image that is typically a miniature representation of the layout of
   the part content. Other possible view types for displaying a part include
   large icon, small icon, and frame.

 tilde
   A mark used to denote the character that is to be used as a mnemonic when
   selecting text items within a menu.

 timer tick
   See clock tick.

 tinkerable
   A level of scripting support of a part. A tinkerable part allows the user to
   customize it, changing its behavior during virtually any user action.
   Compare with scriptable and recordable.

 title bar
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, the area at the top of each
   window that contains the window title and system menu icon. When
   appropriate, it also contains the minimize, maximize, and restore icons.
   Contrast with panel title.

 TLB
   Translation lookaside buffer.

 token
   A short, codified representation of a string. The session object creates
   tokens for ISO strings. In OSA events for OpenDoc, a special descriptor
   structure that a part uses to identify one or more content objects within
   itself.

 token disposal function
   An object callback function that disposes of a token.

 top-level part
   The part that is visually topmost within a window. It might not be a root
   part. For example, when opened into its own window an embedded part is a
   top-level part in that window but it is not the root part of the document it
   is embedded within.

 transform
   (1) The action of modifying a picture by scaling, shearing, reflecting,
   rotating, or translating. (2) The object that performs or defines such a
   modification; also referred to as a transformation.

 translation
   The conversion of one type of data to another type of data. Specifically,
   the conversion of data of one part kind to data of another part kind.

 Tree
   In the Presentation Manager, the window in the File Manager that shows the
   organization of drives and directories.

 truncate
   (1) To terminate a computational process in accordance with some rule
   (A)  (2) To remove the beginning or ending elements of a string. (3) To drop
   data that cannot be printed or displayed in the line width specified or
   available. (4) To shorten a field or statement to a specified length.

 TSR
   Terminate-and-stay-resident.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - U ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 undo
   To rescind a command, negating its results. OpenDoc provides the ability to
   undo events by utilizing a command history.

 unnamed pipe
   A circular buffer, created in memory, used by related processes to
   communicate with one another. Contrast with named pipe.

 unordered list
   In Information Presentation Facility, a vertical arrangement of items in a
   list, with each item in the list preceded by a special character or bullet.

 update region
   A system-provided area of dynamic storage containing one or more (not
   necessarily contiguous) rectangular areas of a window that are visually
   invalid or incorrect, and therefore are in need of repainting.

 update ID
   (1) In OpenDoc, a number used to identify a particular instance of Clipboard
   contents. (2) A number used to identify a particular instance of link source
   data.

 used shape
   A shape that describes the portion of a frame that a part actually uses for
   drawing; that is, the part of the frame that the containing part should not
   draw over.

 user event
   A message, sent to a part by the dispatcher, that pertains only to the state
   of the part's graphical user interface, not directly to its contents. User
   events include mouse clicks and keystrokes, and they deliver information
   about, among other things, window locations and scroll bar positions.
   Compare with semantic event.

 user interface
   Hardware, software, or both that allows a user to interact with and perform
   operations on a system, program, or device.

 user-interface part
   A part without content elements, representing a unit of a document's user
   interface. Buttons and dialog boxes, for example, can be user-interface
   parts.

 user property
   One of a set of user-accessible characteristics of a part or its frame. The
   user can modify some user properties, such as the name of a part; the user
   cannot modify some other user properties, such as part category. Each user
   property defined by OpenDoc is stored as a distinct property in the storage
   unit of the part or its frame.

 utility program
   (1) A computer program in general support of computer processes; for
   example, a diagnostic program, a trace program, a sort program. (T)  (2) A
   program designed to perform an everyday task such as copying data from one
   storage device to another. (A)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - V ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 validate
   To mark a portion of a canvas (or facet, or frame) as no longer in need of
   redrawing. Compare invalidate.

 VGA
   Video graphics array.

 view
   A way of looking at an object's information.

 viewer
   See part viewer.

 view type
   The basic visual representation of a part. Supported view types include
   frame, icon, small icon, and thumbnail.

 viewing pipeline
   The series of transformations applied to a graphic object to map the object
   to the device on which it is to be presented.

 viewing window
   A clipping boundary that defines the visible part of model space.

 VIO
   Video Input/Output.

 virtual memory (VM)
   Synonymous with virtual storage.

 virtual storage
   (1) The storage space that may be regarded as addressable main storage by
   the user of a computer system in which virtual addresses are mapped into
   real addresses. The size of virtual storage is limited by the addressing
   scheme of the computer system and by the amount of auxiliary storage
   available, not by the actual number of main storage locations. (I)  (A)  (2)
   Addressable space that is apparent to the user as the processor storage
   space, from which the instructions and the data are mapped into the
   processor storage locations. (3) Synonymous with virtual memory.

 visible region
   A window's presentation space, clipped to the boundary of the window and the
   boundaries of any overlying window.

 volume
   (1) A file-system driver that uses a block device driver for input and
   output operations to a local or remote device. (I)  (2) A portion of data,
   together with its data carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 weak persistent reference
   A persistent reference that, when the storage unit containing the reference
   is cloned, is ignored; the referenced storage unit is not copied. Compare
   strong persistent reference.

 wildcard character
   Synonymous with global file-name character.

 window
   (1) A portion of a display surface in which display images pertaining to a
   particular application can be presented. Different applications can be
   displayed simultaneously in different windows. (A)  (2) An area of the
   screen with visible boundaries within which information is displayed. A
   window can be smaller than or the same size as the screen. Windows can
   appear to overlap on the screen. (3) A division of a screen in which one of
   several programs being executed concurrently can display information.

 window canvas
   The canvas attached to the root facet of a window. Every window has a window
   canvas.

 window class
   The grouping of windows whose processing needs conform to the services
   provided by one window procedure.

 window-content transform
   The composite transform that converts from a part's content coordinates to
   its window coordinates.

 window coordinates
   A set of coordinates by which a window position or size is defined; measured
   in device units, or pels.

 window-frame transform
   The composite transform that converts from a part's frame coordinates to its
   window coordinates.

 window handle
   Unique identifier of a window, generated by Presentation Manager when the
   window is created, and used by applications to direct messages to the
   window.

 window procedure
   Code that is activated in response to a message. The procedure controls the
   appearance and behavior of its associated windows.

 window rectangle
   The means by which the size and position of a window is described in
   relation to the desktop window.

 window resource
   A read-only data segment stored in the .EXE file of an application o the
   .DLL file of a dynamic link library.

 window state
   An object that lists the set of windows that are open at a given time. Part
   editors can alter the window state, and the window state can be persistently
   stored.

 window style
   The set of properties that influence how events related to a particular
   window will be processed.

 window title
   In Advanced Common User Access architecture, the area in the title bar that
   contains the name of the application and the OS/2 operating system file
   name, if applicable.

 Workplace Shell
   The OS/2 object-oriented, graphical user interface.

 workstation
   (1) A display screen together with attachments such as a keyboard, a local
   copy device, or a tablet. (2) (D of C) One or more programmable or
   nonprogrammable devices that allow a user to do work.

 world coordinates
   A device-independent Cartesian coordinate system used by the application
   program for specifying graphical input and output. (I)  (A)

 world-coordinate space
   Coordinate space in which graphics are defined before transformations are
   applied.

 object
   An object (or class) that exists to provide an object-oriented interface to
   a non-object- oriented or system-specific structure. The OpenDoc class
   ODWindow, for example, is a wrapper for a system-specific window structure.

 WYSIWYG
   What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get. A capability of a text editor to continually
   display pages exactly as they will be printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - X ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are no glossary terms for this starting letter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - Y ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are no glossary terms for this starting letter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - Z ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 z-order
   The order in which sibling windows are presented. The topmost sibling window
   obscures any portion of the siblings that it overlaps; the same effect
   occurs down through the order of lower sibling windows.

 z-ordering
   The front-to-back ordering of sibling frames used to determine clipping and
   event handling when frames overlap.

 zooming
   The progressive scaling of an entire display image in order to give the
   visual impression of movement of all or part of a display group toward or
   away from an observer. (I)  (A)

 8.3 file-name format
   A file-naming convention in which file names are limited to eight characters
   before and three characters after a single dot. Usually pronounced
   "eight-dot-three." See also non-8.3 file-name format.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For implementation efficiency, parts may not be deleted until some time after
the last frame (or icon) has been deleted, however the user should not be aware
of this. The Save choice periodically removes these unnecessary parts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For example, a clock part might have such few actions that there would be no
need to activate the part. The user could select it and use the Selected
pulldown of its container to perform actions on it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The name "Document" is the default name for the menu pull-down. The top-level
part editor should change the name to the category name of the part or some
equivalent name. For example, if the developer had a drawing object, "Drawing"
could replace "Document" as the name of the menu when that part is the active
part.  Each part has its own window to display when it is active.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Mnemonics for Icon, Tree, Details, and Drafts are I, T, D, and F.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OpenDoc uses the clipboard actions Cut, Copy, Paste, and Create. WorkPlace
Shell does not use the clipboard, but uses Copy, Move, and Create Another
dialog boxes as well as Pickup and Drop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Mnemonics to be used for a menu choice are underlined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the Create New window setting in the OS/2 System object is set, a new window
will be opened.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In addition to Ctrl+P for Print, the parts should support the OS/2 Presentation
Manager standard of Shift+Print Screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit menu shows the use of Ctrl+X,C,V for Cut, Copy, and Paste. Parts
should also support the OS/2 Presentation Manager standard of Shift+Insert for
paste; Ctrl+Insert for copy; and Shift+Delete for Cut.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The name frame could be replaced with the name of the view, for example Chart
or Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The appropriate appearance is illustrated in Appendix B.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Developers should never look for the raw mouse events; instead look for
semantic level messages.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Instead of using the word "Frame" developers could list the actual name of the
view. For example, if a part had both Chart and Table views, instead of listing
Frame in the list, the part could list Chart and Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The selection button default in OS/2 is MB1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If both the target and source reside on the same removable media, the drag
would still be a move.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the way a template works in OS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

It might be useful to retain previous versions of an editor since different
versions have different bugs or one version does not support older versions of
the document format.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Previously known as the Parts palette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The user might be able to view the a part in a document in multiple frames.
This provides some of the capabilities as linking, but it is not as general a
solution.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

All means links merged with intrinsic content or those embedded in the active
part. Links inside of other embedded parts would not be shown.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If Create New Window is set in the OS/2 System object, then a new window for
the part containing the link will be opened.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is guideline for developers, OpenDoc cannot guarantee that formatting will
be preserved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Theoretically, OpenDoc could try to preserve some of these links, but the rules
for when a link will and will not be broken are so complex that users cannot
understand them.